Service Manual - Handycam - Dcrtrv130e

DCR-TRV130/TRV130E RMT-814
SERVICE MANUAL US Model

Canadian Model
Level 2 Ver 1.2 2001. 11 Korea Model
Brazilian Model
DCR-TRV130
AEP Model
UK Model
Australian Model
Chinese Model
DCR-TRV130E
E Model
Hong Kong Model
Photo : DCR-TRV130E DCR-TRV130/TRV130E
M2000 MECHANISM
On the VC-256 board For MECHANISM ADJUSTMENT, refer to the

This service manual provides the information that is premised the “8mm Video MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT
circuit board replacement service and not intended repair inside the MANUAL IX M2000 MECHANISM ” (9-929-
VC-256 board. 861-11).
Therefore, schematic diagram, printed wiring board and electrical parts
list of the VC-256 board are not shown. NTSC model : DCR-TRV130
The following pages are not shown. PAL model : DCR-TRV130E
Printed wiring board ......................... Pages 4-61 to 4-64
Schematic diagram .......................... Pages 4-31 to 4-60
Electrical parts list ............................ Pages 6-15 to 6-22
SPECIFICATIONS
— Continued on next page —
DIGITAL VIDEO CAMERA RECORDER
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

• SUPPLIED ACCESSORIES
Make sure that the following accessories are supplied with your
camcorder.
Table for difference of function

Model DCR-TRV130 DCR-TRV130E Remark
Destination US,CND,E,HK, E,HK,AUS, AEP,UK
KR,JE,BR JE,CN
Color system NTSC PAL
LINE REC a ✕✕ DV signal only
• Abbreviation
CND : Canadian model CN : Chinese model
HK : Hong Kong model KR : Korea model
AUS : Australian model BR : Brazilian model
JE : Tourist model
SAFETY-RELATED COMPONENT WARNING!! ATTENTION AU COMPOSANT AYANT RAPPORT

À LA SÉCURITÉ!
COMPONENTS IDENTIFIED BY MARK 0 OR DOTTED LINE WITH LES COMPOSANTS IDENTIFÉS PAR UNE MARQUE 0 SUR LES
MARK 0 ON THE SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS AND IN THE PARTS DIAGRAMMES SCHÉMATIQUES ET LA LISTE DES PIÈCES SONT
LIST ARE CRITICAL TO SAFE OPERATION. REPLACE THESE CRITIQUES POUR LA SÉCURITÉ DE FONCTIONNEMENT. NE
COMPONENTS WITH SONY PARTS WHOSE PART NUMBERS REMPLACER CES COMPOSANTS QUE PAR DES PIÈSES SONY
APPEAR AS SHOWN IN THIS MANUAL OR IN SUPPLEMENTS DONT LES NUMÉROS SONT DONNÉS DANS CE MANUEL OU
PUBLISHED BY SONY. DANS LES SUPPÉMENTS PUBLIÉS PAR SONY.
SAFETY CHECK-OUT
After correcting the original service problem, perform the following

safety checks before releasing the set to the customer.
1. Check the area of your repair for unsoldered or poorly-soldered 4. Look for parts which, through functioning, show obvious signs
connections. Check the entire board surface for solder splashes of deterioration. Point them out to the customer and
and bridges. recommend their replacement.
2. Check the interboard wiring to ensure that no wires are 5. Check the B+ voltage to see it is at the values specified.
"pinched" or contact high-wattage resistors. 6. Flexible Circuit Board Repairing
3. Look for unauthorized replacement parts, particularly • Keep the temperature of the soldering iron around 270˚C
transistors, that were installed during a previous repair. Point during repairing.
them out to the customer and recommend their replacement. • Do not touch the soldering iron on the same conductor of the
circuit board (within 3 times).
• Be careful not to apply force on the conductor when soldering
or unsoldering.
—2—
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SERVICE NOTE Quick Reference
1. POWER SUPPLY DURING REPAIRS ····························· 6 Identifying the parts and controls ········································ 1-27
2. TO TAKE OUT A CASSETTE WHEN NOT EJECT
(FORCE EJECT) ································································ 6 2. DISASSEMBLY
2-1. VIDEO LIGHT ································································ 2-2
SELF-DIAGNOSIS FUNCTION 2-2. LCD SECTION (PD-131 BOARD) ································ 2-3
1. Self-diagnosis Function ······················································ 7 2-3. FRONT PANEL SECTION (MI-041 BOARD) ·············· 2-4
2. Self-diagnosis Display ························································ 7 2-4. CABINET (L) SECTION ················································ 2-5
3. Service Mode Display ························································ 7 2-5. CABINET (R) SECTION, CONTROL SWITCH BLOCK
3-1. Display Method ·································································· 7 (CF-1000) ········································································ 2-6
3-2. Switching of Backup No. ··················································· 7 2-6. EVF SECTION (VF-129 BOARD) ································· 2-7
3-3. End of Display ···································································· 7 2-7. BATTERY PANEL SECTION
4. Self-diagnosis Code Table ·················································· 8 (BATTERY TERMINAL BOARD) ································ 2-8
2-8. LENS SECTION ····························································· 2-9
1. GENERAL 2-9. VC-256 BOARD ····························································· 2-9
Checking supplied accessories ·················································· 1-1 2-10. MECHANISM DECK ··················································· 2-12
Quick Start Guide ······································································ 1-1 2-11. HINGE SECTION ························································· 2-12
Getting started 2-12. CIRCUIT BOARDS LOCATION ································· 2-13
Using this manual ·································································· 1-1 2-13. FLEXIBLE BOARDS LOCATION ······························ 2-14
Step 1 Preparing the power supply ········································ 1-2
Installing the battery pack ···················································· 1-2 3. BLOCK DIAGRAMS
Charging the battery pack ···················································· 1-2 3-1. OVERALL BLOCK DIAGRAM (1/5) ··························· 3-1
Connecting to the mains ······················································ 1-3 3-2. OVERALL BLOCK DIAGRAM (2/5) ··························· 3-3
Step 2 Setting the date and time ············································ 1-3 3-3. OVERALL BLOCK DIAGRAM (3/5) ··························· 3-5
Step 3 Inserting a cassette ······················································ 1-4 3-4. OVERALL BLOCK DIAGRAM (4/5) ··························· 3-7
Recording –Basics 3-5. OVERALL BLOCK DIAGRAM (5/5) ··························· 3-9
Recording a picture ································································ 1-4 3-6. POWER BLOCK DIAGRAM (1/2) ······························ 3-11
Shooting backlit subjects –BACK LIGHT ·························· 1-6 3-7. POWER BLOCK DIAGRAM (2/2) ······························ 3-13
Shooting in the dark –NightShot/Super NightShot ············· 1-6
Checking the recording –END SEARCH ···························· 1-7 4. PRINTED WIRING BOARDS AND
Playback –Basics SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS
Playing back a tape ································································ 1-7 4-1. FRAME SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM (1/2) ······················· 4-1
Viewing the recording on TV ················································ 1-9 FRAME SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM (2/2) ······················· 4-3
Advanced Recording Operations 4-2. PRINTED WIRING BOARDS AND
Recording a still image on a tape –Tape Photo recording ····· 1-9 SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS ············································ 4-5
Using the wide mode ··························································· 1-10 • CD-281 (CCD IMAGER)
Using the fader function ······················································ 1-10 PRINTED WIRING BOARD ························· 4-7
Using special effects –Picture effect ···································· 1-11 • CD-281 (CCD IMAGER)
Using special effects –Digital effect ···································· 1-12 SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM ······························ 4-8
Using the PROGRAM AE function ····································· 1-12 • MI-041 (STEADY SHOT, MIC AMP, IR DRIVE)
Adjusting the exposure manually ········································ 1-13 PRINTED WIRING BOARD ························· 4-9
Focusing manually ······························································· 1-13 • MI-041 (STEADY SHOT, MIC AMP)(1/2)
Superimposing a title ··························································· 1-14 SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM ···························· 4-11
Making your own titles ························································ 1-14 • MI-041 (IR DRIVE)(2/2)
Using the built-in light ························································· 1-15 SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM ···························· 4-13
Advanced Playback Operations • PD-131 (RGB, TIMING GENERATOR, BACK LIGHT)
Playing back a tape with picture effects ······························ 1-16 PRINTED WIRING BOARD ······················· 4-15
Playing back a tape with digital effects ······························· 1-16 • PD-131 (RGB, TIMING GENERATOR)(1/2)
Enlarging images recorded on tapes –Tape PB ZOOM ······· 1-17 SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM ···························· 4-19
Quickly locating a scene using the zero set memory function ·· 1-17 • PD-131 (BACK LIGHT)(2/2)
Searching a recording by date –Date search ························ 1-18 SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM ···························· 4-21
Searching for a photo –Photo search/Photo scan ················· 1-18 • VF-129 (B/W EVF)
Editing PRINTED WIRING BOARD ······················· 4-23
Dubbing a tape ····································································· 1-19 • VF-129 (B/W EVF)
Customizing Your Camcorder SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM ···························· 4-25
Changing the menu settings ················································· 1-20 • CONTROL SWITCH BLOCK (CF-1000)
Troubleshooting SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM ···························· 4-27
Tupes of trouble and their solutions ···································· 1-21 • LS-057 (S/T REEL SENSOR), FP-228 (DEW SENSOR),
Self-diagnosis display ·························································· 1-22 FP-299 (MODE SWITCH), FP-300 (TAPE TOP),
Warning indicators and messages ········································ 1-23 FP-302 (TAPE END), FP-301 (TAPE LED)
Additional Information FLEXIBLE BOARDS AND
About video cassettes ·························································· 1-23 SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS ·························· 4-29
About the “InfoLITHIUM” battery pack ····························· 1-24 • FP-258 (VIDEO LIGHT, S VIDEO)
About i.LINK ······································································· 1-24 FLEXIBLE BOARD AND
Using your camcorder abroad ·············································· 1-25 SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM
Maintenance information and precautions ··························· 1-25
—3—
Shematic diagram and printed wiring board of the 5-2. MECHANISM SECTION ADJUSTMENT ·················· 5-30
VC-256 board are not shown. 2-1. ADJUSTMENT REMOTE COMMANDER ················ 5-30
Pages from 4-31 to 4-64 are not shown. 2-2. HOW TO ENTER RECORD MODE WITHOUT
CASSETTE ··································································· 5-30
4-3. WAVEFORMS ······························································ 4-65 2-3. HOW TO ENTER PLAYBACK MODE WITHOUT
4-4. MOUNTED PARTS LOCATION ································· 4-69 CASSETTE ··································································· 5-30
2-4. TAPE PATH ADJUSTMENT ········································ 5-31
5. ADJUSTMENTS 2-4-1. Preparations for Adjustment ·········································· 5-31
1. Before starting adjustment ··············································· 5-2 2-4-2. Tape Path adjustment ····················································· 5-32
1-1. Adjusting items when replacing main parts and boards ·· 5-2 2-4-3. No.7 Guide (TG7) Adjustment ······································ 5-33
5-1. CAMERA SECTION ADJUSTMENT ··························· 5-4 2-4-4. CUE, REV Waveforms Check ······································· 5-33
1-1. PREPARATIONS BEFORE ADJUSTMENT 2-5. CHECKS AFTER ADJUSTMENTS ····························· 5-33
(CAMERA SECTION) ··················································· 5-4 2-5-1. Waveform Build-up Check ············································ 5-33
1-1-1. List of Service Tools ························································ 5-4 2-5-2. Tape Path Check ···························································· 5-33
1-1-2. Preparations ····································································· 5-5 5-3. VIDEO SECTION ADJUSTMENT ······························ 5-34
1-1-3. Precaution ········································································ 5-7 3-1. PREPARATIONS BEFORE ADJUSTMENTS ············ 5-34
1. Setting the Switch ···························································· 5-7 3-1-1. Equipment to Required ·················································· 5-34
2. Order of Adjustments ······················································ 5-7 3-1-2. Precautions on Adjusting ··············································· 5-35
3. Subjects ··········································································· 5-7 3-1-3. Adjusting Connectors ···················································· 5-36
1-2. INITIALIZATION OF C, D, E, F, 7, 8 PAGE DATA ····· 5-8 3-1-4. Connecting the Equipment ············································ 5-36
1-2-1. INITIALIZATION OF C, D, 8 PAGE DATA ·················· 5-8 3-1-5. Alignment Tape ····························································· 5-37
1. Initializing the C, D, 8 Page Data ···································· 5-8 3-1-6. Output Level and Impedance ········································· 5-37
2. Modification of C, D, 8 Page Data ·································· 5-8 3-2. SYSTEM CONTROL SYSTEM ADJUSTMENT ········ 5-38
3. C Page Table ···································································· 5-8 1. Initialization of C, D, E, F, 7, 8 Page Data ···················· 5-38
4. D Page Table ···································································· 5-9 2. Serial No. Input ····························································· 5-38
5. 8 Page Table ··································································· 5-10 2-1. Company ID Input ························································· 5-38
1-2-2. INITIALIZATION OF E, F, 7 PAGE DATA ················· 5-11 2-2. Serial No. Input ····························································· 5-38
1. Initializing the E, F, 7 Page Data ··································· 5-11 3-3. SERVO AND RF SYSTEM ADJUSTMENT ··············· 5-40
2. Modification of E, F, 7 Page Data ································· 5-11 1. REEL FG Adjustment (VC-256 Board) ························ 5-40
3. F Page Table ·································································· 5-11 2. CAP FG Duty Adjustment (VC-256 Board) ················· 5-40
4. E Page Table ·································································· 5-12 3. PLL fo & LPF fo Pre-Adjustment (VC-256 Board) ······ 5-41
5. 7 Page Table ··································································· 5-12 4. Switching Position Adjustment (VC-256 Board) ·········· 5-41
1-3. CAMERA SYSTEM ADJUSTMENTS ························ 5-13 5. AGC Center Level and APC & AEQ Adjustment ········· 5-42
1. HALL Adjustment ························································· 5-13 5-1. Preparations before adjustments ···································· 5-42
2. Flange Back Adjustment (Using Minipattern Box) ······· 5-14 5-2. AGC Center Level Adjustment (VC-256 Board) ·········· 5-42
3. Flange Back Adjustment 5-3. APC & AEQ Adjustment (VC-256 Board) ··················· 5-42
(Using Flange Back Adjustment Chart and Subject More 5-4. Processing after Completing Adjustments ···················· 5-43
Than 500m Away) ························································· 5-15 6. PLL fo & LPF fo Fine Adjustment (VC-256 Board) ···· 5-43
3-1. Flange Back Adjustment (1) ·········································· 5-15 3-4. VIDEO SYSTEM ADJUSTMENTS ····························· 5-44
3-2. Flange Back Adjustment (2) ·········································· 5-15 1. 27MHz Origin Oscillation Adjustment (VC-256 Board) ·· 5-44
4. Flange Back Check ························································ 5-16 2. Chroma BPF fo Adjustment (VC-256 Board) ··············· 5-44
5. Picture Frame Setting ···················································· 5-16 3. S VIDEO OUT Y Level Adjustment (VC-256 Board) ·· 5-45
6. Color Reproduction Adjustment ···································· 5-17 4. S VIDEO OUT Chroma Level Adjustment
7. Auto White Balance & LV Standard Data Input ··········· 5-18 (VC-256 Board) ····························································· 5-45
8. Auto White Balance Adjustment ··································· 5-19 5. VIDEO OUT Y, Chroma Level Check (VC-256 Board) ·· 5-46
9. White Balance Check ···················································· 5-20 3-5. IR TRANSMITTER ADJUSTMENTS (DCR-TRV130) ·· 5-47
10. Angular Velocity Sensor Sensitivity Adjustment ·········· 5-21 1. IR Video Carrier Frequency Adjustment (MI-041 Board) ·· 5-47
1-4. MONOCHROME ELECTRONIC VIEWFINEDER 2. IR Video Deviation Adjustment (MI-041 Board) ·········· 5-47
SYSTEM ADJUSTMENTS ·········································· 5-22 3. IR Audio Deviation Adjustment (MI-041 Board) ········· 5-48
1-4-1. Horizontal Slant Check ················································· 5-22 3-6. AUDIO SYSTEM ADJUSTMENTS ···························· 5-49
1-4-2. Centering Adjustment ··················································· 5-22 1. Playback Level Check ··················································· 5-49
1-4-3. Focus Adjustment ························································· 5-22 5-4. SERVICE MODE ·························································· 5-50
1-4-4. Aberration Adjustment ·················································· 5-23 4-1. ADJUSTMENT REMOTE COMMANDER ················ 5-50
1-4-5. Horizontal Amplitude Adjustment (VF-129 board) ······ 5-23 1. Using the Adjustment Remote Commander ·················· 5-50
1-4-6. Vertical Amplitude Adjustment (VF-129 board) ··········· 5-24 2. Precautions Upon Using the Adjustment Remote
1-4-7. Brightness Adjustment (VF-129 board) ························ 5-24 Commander ··································································· 5-50
1-4-8. Horizontal Amplitude, Vertical Amplitude, 4-2. DATA PROCESS ··························································· 5-51
Focus Check ·································································· 5-24 4-3. SERVICE MODE ·························································· 5-52
1-5. LCD SYSTEM ADJUSTMENT ··································· 5-25 1. Setting the Test Mode ···················································· 5-52
1. LCD Initial Data Input (1) ············································· 5-25 2. Emergence Memory Address ········································ 5-52
2. LCD Initial Data Input (2) ············································· 5-26 2-1. C Page Emergence Memory Address ···························· 5-52
3. VCO Adjustment (PD-131 board) ································· 5-26 2-2. EMG Code (Emergency Code) ····································· 5-53
4. RGB AMP Adjustment (PD-131 board) ························ 5-27 2-3. MSW Code ···································································· 5-54
5. Contrast Adjustment (PD-131 board) ···························· 5-27 3. Bit Value Discrimination ··············································· 5-55
6. COM AMP Adjustment (PD-131 board) ······················· 5-28 4. Switch check (1) ···························································· 5-55
7. V-COM Adjustment (PD-131 board) ···························· 5-28 5. Switch check (2) ···························································· 5-55
8. White Balance Adjustment (PD-131 board) ·················· 5-29 6. Switch check (3) ···························································· 5-55
—4—
7. Switch check (4) ···························································· 5-56
8. Record of Use check ······················································ 5-56
9. Record of Self-diagnosis check ····································· 5-57
6. REPAIR PARTS LIST

6-1. EXPLODED VIEWS ······················································ 6-1
6-1-1. OVERALL SECTION ····················································· 6-1
6-1-2. CABINET (L) SECTION ················································ 6-2
6-1-3. EVF SECTION ································································ 6-3
6-1-4. LENS SECTION ····························································· 6-4
6-1-5. CABINET (R) SECTION ··············································· 6-5
6-1-6. LCD SECTION ······························································· 6-6
6-1-7. CASSETTE COMPARTMENT ASSY, DRUM ASSY ··· 6-7
6-1-8. LS CHASSIS BLOCK ASSEMBLY ······························· 6-8
6-1-9. MECHANICAL CHASSIS BLOCK ASSEMBLY-1 ······ 6-9
6-1-10. MECHANICAL CHASSIS BLOCK ASSEMBLY-2 ··· 6-10
6-2. ELECTRICAL PARTS LIST ········································ 6-11
Parts list of the VC-256 board are not shown.

Pages from 6-15 to 6-22 are not shown.
* Color reproduction frame is shown on page 179.
—5—
SERVICE NOTE
1. POWER SUPPLY DURING REPAIRS

In this unit, about 10 seconds after power is supplied (8.4V) to the battery terminal using the service power code (J-6082-223-A), the power
is shut off so that the unit cannot operate.
These following two methods are available to prevent this. Take note of which to use during repairs.
Method 1.
Use the DC IN terminal. (Use the AC power adaptor.)
Method 2.
Connect the adjustment remote commander RM-95 (J-6082-053-B) to the LANC jack, and set the HOLD switch to the “ADJ” side.
2. TO TAKE OUT A CASSETTE WHEN NOT EJECT (FORCE EJECT)

1 Refer to 2-3. to remove the front panel section.
2 Refer to 2-4. to remove the cabinet (L) section.
3 Refer to 2-5. to remove the cabinet (R) section.
4 Open the control switch block (FK-1000).
5 Disconnect CN4401 (2P) of VC-256 board.
6 Add +5V from the DC POWER SUPPLY and unload with a pressing the cassette compertment.
7 Pull the timing belt in the direction of

arrow A with a pincette while pressing
the cassette compartment (take care
not to damage) to adjust the bending
of a tape.
Pincette
A
Timing belt
Press the cassette compartment not

to rise the cassette compartment
8 Let your hold the cassette

compartment and rise the cassette
compartment to take out a cassette.
Timing belt
DC power supply
(+5V)
Adjust the bending
of a tape
Loading
motor
Disconnect CN4401 of
VC-256 board
—6—
SELF-DIAGNOSIS FUNCTION
1. Self-diagnosis Function 2. Self-diagnosis Display

When problems occur while the unit is operating, the self-diagnosis When problems occur while the unit is operating, the counter of the
function starts working, and displays on the viewfinder or LCD or viewfinder or LCD or Display window shows a 4-digit display
Display window what to do. This function consists of two display; consisting of an alphabet and numbers, which blinks at 3.2 Hz. This
self-diagnosis display and service mode display. 5-character display indicates the “repaired by:”, “block” in which
Details of the self-diagnosis functions are provided in the Instruction the problem occurred, and “detailed code” of the problem.
manual.
Viewfinder or LCD Display window
C:31:11 C : 3 1 : 11
Display window
Blinks at 3.2Hz
C 31 11
Repaired by: Block Detailed Code

C : Corrected by customer Indicates the appropriate Refer to page 8 and 9.
H : Corrected by dealer step to be taken. Self-diagnosis Code Table.
E : Corrected by service E.g.
engineer 31 ....Reload the tape.
32 ....Turn on power again.
3. Service Mode Display

The service mode display shows up to six self-diagnosis codes shown in the past.
3-1. Display Method

While pressing the “STOP” key, set the switch from OFF to “VCR or PLAYER”, and continue pressing the “STOP” key for 5 seconds
continuously. The service mode will be displayed, and the counter will show the backup No. and the 5-character self-diagnosis codes.
Viewfinder or LCD Display window

[3] C : 3 1 : 1 1 3 C : 3 1 : 11
Lights up
[3] C:31:11
Backup No. Self-diagnosis Codes

Order of previous errors
Control dial
3-2. Switching of Backup No.
By rotating the control dial, past self-diagnosis codes will be shown in order. The backup No. in the [] indicates the order in which the
problem occurred. (If the number of problems which occurred is less than 6, only the number of problems which occurred will be shown.)
[1] : Occurred first time [4] : Occurred fourth time
[2] : Occurred second time [5] : Occurred fifth time
[3] : Occurred third time [6] : Occurred the last time
3-3. End of Display

Turning OFF the power supply will end the service mode display.
Note: The “self-diagnosis display” data will be backed up by the built-in rechargeable lithium battery (CF-1000 block BT101).
When the cabinet (R) assembly is disconnected, the “self-diagnosis display” data will be lost by initialization.
—7—
4. Self-diagnosis Code Table
Self-diagnosis Code
Repaired by:
Block Detailed Symptom/State Correction

Function Code
C 0 4 0 0 Non-standard battery is used. Use the InfoLITHIUM battery.

C 2 1 0 0 Condensation. Remove the cassette, and insert it again after one hour.
C 2 2 0 0 Video head is dirty. Clean with the optional cleaning cassette.
LOAD direction. Loading does not
C 3 1 1 0 Load the tape again, and perform operations from the beginning.
complete within specified time
UNLOAD direction. Loading does not
C 3 1 1 1 Load the tape again, and perform operations from the beginning.
complete within specified time
C 3 1 2 0 T reel side tape slacking when unloading. Load the tape again, and perform operations from the beginning.
C 3 1 2 1 S reel side tape slacking when unloading. Load the tape again, and perform operations from the beginning.
C 3 1 2 2 T reel fault. Load the tape again, and perform operations from the beginning.
C 3 1 2 3 S reel fault. Load the tape again, and perform operations from the beginning.
C 3 1 3 0 FG fault when starting capstan. Load the tape again, and perform operations from the beginning.
C 3 1 3 1 FG fault during normal capstan operations. Load the tape again, and perform operations from the beginning.
C 3 1 4 0 FG fault when starting drum. Load the tape again, and perform operations from the beginning.
C 3 1 4 1 PG fault when starting drum. Load the tape again, and perform operations from the beginning.
C 3 1 4 2 FG fault during normal drum operations. Load the tape again, and perform operations from the beginning.
C 3 1 4 3 PG fault during normal drum operations. Load the tape again, and perform operations from the beginning.
C 3 1 4 4 Phase fault during normal drum operations. Load the tape again, and perform operations from the beginning.
LOAD direction loading motor time- Remove the battery or power cable, connect, and perform
C 3 2 1 0
out. operations from the beginning.
UNLOAD direction loading motor Remove the battery or power cable, connect, and perform
C 3 2 1 1
time-out. operations from the beginning.
T reel side tape slacking when Remove the battery or power cable, connect, and perform
C 3 2 2 0
unloading. operations from the beginning.
S reel side tape slacking when Remove the battery or power cable, connect, and perform
C 3 2 2 1
unloading. operations from the beginning.
Remove the battery or power cable, connect, and perform
C 3 2 2 2 T reel fault. operations from the beginning.
C 3 2 2 3 S reel fault. operations from the beginning.
C 3 2 3 0 FG fault when starting capstan.
operations from the beginning.
FG fault during normal capstan Remove the battery or power cable, connect, and perform
C 3 2 3 1
operations. operations from the beginning.
C 3 2 4 0 FG fault when starting drum.
C 3 2 4 1 PG fault when starting drum.
FG fault during normal drum Remove the battery or power cable, connect, and perform
C 3 2 4 2
PG fault during normal drum Remove the battery or power cable, connect, and perform
C 3 2 4 3
Phase fault during normal drum Remove the battery or power cable, connect, and perform
C 3 2 4 4
—8—
Self-diagnosis Code
Repaired by:
Block Detailed Symptom/State Correction
Function Code
Inspect the lens block focus reset sensor (Pin qs of CN1551 of

Difficult to adjust focus VC-256 board) when focusing is performed when the control dial
E 6 1 0 0
(Cannot initialize focus.) is rotated in the focus manual mode and the focus motor drive circuit
(IC1551 of VC-256 board) when the focusing is not performed.
Inspect the lens block zoom reset sensor (Pin qf of CN1551 of
Zoom operations fault VC-256 board) when zooming is performed when the zoom lens is
E 6 1 1 0
(Cannot initialize zoom lens.) operated and the zoom motor drive circuit (IC1551 of VC-256
board) when zooming is not performed.
Handshake correction function does not
Inspect pitch angular velocity sensor (SE751 of MI-041 board)
E 6 2 0 0 work well. (With pitch angular velocity
peripheral circuits.
sensor output stopped.)
Handshake correction function does not
Inspect yaw angular velocity sensor (SE752 of MI-041 board)
E 6 2 0 1 work well. (With yaw angular velocity
peripheral circuits.
sensor output stopped.)
—9—
DCR-TRV130/TRV130E
SECTION 1
This section is extracted from instruction
GENERAL manual. (DCR-TRV130E model)
1-1
1-2
1-3
1-4
1-5
1-6
1-7
1-8
1-9
1-10
1-11
1-12
1-13
1-14
1-15
1-16
1-17
1-18
1-19
1-20
1-21
1-22
1-23
1-24
1-25
1-26
1-27
1-28
1-29E
DCR-TRV130/TRV130E
SECTION 2
DISASSEMBLY
The following flow chart shows the disassembly procedure.
2-1. Video light
2-2. LCD section (PD-131 board) PD-131 board service position
2-3. Front panel section (MI-041 board) MI-041 board service position
2-4. Cabinet (L) section Mechanism deck service position

DCR-TRV130/TRV130E
Note : Use the parts only which can be removed

easily from outside of the mechanism deck.
2-5. Cabinet (R) section, Control switch block (CF-1000)
2-6. EVF section (VF-129 board) VF-129, CD-281, MI-041 boards

service position
2-7, Battery panel section (Battery terminal board) 2-11. Hinge section
2-8, Lens section
2-9. VC-256 board Service position to check the VTR section
2-10. Mechanism deck Service position to check the Camera section
2-1
[CONNECTION OF EQUIPMENTS]
CN1011
1 2
Info lithium battery

(L series) 19 20
Adjustment remote
commander (RM-95)
Two claws
CPC lid AC power
adaptor AC IN
CPC-jig
(J-6082-521-A)
NOTE: Follow the disassembly procedure in the numerical order given.

2-1. VIDEO LIGHT
3 Remove in the direction

of the arrow A.
1 Push in the dent

inside hole with 4 Halogen lamp
wire tip.
2 Video light
2-2
2-2. LCD SECTION (PD-131 BOARD)
3 Five claws
4 P cabinet C
2 MI screw A
(M2 × 4) (H)
5 Two tapping
screws (B2 × 7)
1
3
-1
D
P
9 PD-131 board,
Panel frame
8 Back light
Cold cathode
fluorescent tube
7 Liquid crystal
indicator module
A
6 P cabinet M assembly
1 Two tapping
screws (B2 × 5)
[PD-131 BOARD SERVICE POSITION]
Info lithium battery PD-131 board

(L series)
CPC-jig
(J-6082-521-A)
Adjustment remote
1
3
-1
commander (RM-95)
D
P
AC power
adaptor AC IN
Panel frame (12)
Liquid crystal
indicator module
CN5502
Back light
Cold cathode
Multi CPC jig fluorescent tube
(J-6082-311-A)
2-3
2-3. FRONT PANEL SECTION (MI-041 BOARD)
1 Open the jack cover
3 MI screw
(M2 × 4) (H)
2 Two MI screws
(M2 × 4) (H)
4 Two MI screws
(M2 × 4) (H)
5 Claw 6 FP-263 flexible
board (24P)
7 Front panel section
1 Two tapping
3 Two tapping screws (B2 × 5)
screws (B2 × 5)
5 Microphone (Rch)
MI
Bo-041
ar
d
3 Microphone
4 MI-041 board retainer (rear)
6 Microphone (Lch)
2 Four claws
2 Microphone (Lch) (2P) 4 Microphone
1 Microphone (Rch) (2P) retainer (front)
[MI-041 BOARD SERVICE POSITION]
AC power
adaptor AC IN
FP-263 flexible
board (24P)
MI-
041

(L series)
MI-041 board
Adjustment remote
commander (RM-95)
CPC-jig
(J-6082-521-A)
2-4
2-4. CABINET (L) SECTION
1 3 Cassette lid assembly
2 Two MI screws
(M2 × 4) (H)
4 MI screw
(M2 × 4) (H)
6 Two MI screws
(M2 × 4) (H)
8 Cabinet (L) section
5 MI screw
(M2 × 4) (H)
7 MI screw
(M2 × 4) (H)
[MECHANISM DECK SERVICE POSITION]

Note: Use the parts only which can be removed easily from outside of the mechanism deck.
Mechanism deck
AC power AC IN
adaptor
2-5
2-5. CABINET (R) SECTION, CONTROL SWITCH BLOCK (CF-1000)
1 MI screw
(M2 × 4) (H)
4 Claw
2 MI screw
(M2 × 4) (H)
7 Cabinet (R) section
6 FFC-295 flexible
flat cable (24P)
5 Harness 3 Three MI screws

(PD-110) (20P) (M2 × 4) (H)
7 Remove the control switch block

(CF-1000) in the direction of the
arrow A B .
A
B 6 Tape (A) 8 Control switch block

Tape (A) (CF-1000)
3 Electro luminous
element (4P)
5 Five tapping 2 FP-260 flexible board (16P)

screws (B2 × 5)
4 Push switch (2P)
1 FFC-295 flexible flat cable (24P)
2-6
2-6. EVF SECTION (VF-129 BOARD)
4
3 EVF section
3 VF base B
PRECAUTION DURING
INSTALLATION
1 FFC-289 flexible 2 Three tapping Tape (A)

flat cable (4P) screws (B2 × 5)
3 Finder (S) assembly 1 Tape (A) FFC-289 flexible

Rotate it in the direction of 2 Two loose flat cable
the arrow B and remove it stopper screws
in the direction of the arrow C. (M2 × 3)
B 8 CRT assembly, VF-129 board,

FFC-289 flexible flat cable
4 EVF cabinet
A upper B assembly
4 3 Claw
1 F lock
screw (T)
2 Two tapping
screws
2 Slide the button in the (B2 × 5)
direction of the arrow A.
5 Tapping screw
(B2 × 5)
6 EVF tally
7 EVF cabinet lower B
2 Two tapping 1 VF hinge assembly

screws (B2 × 5)
REMOVING THE CRT ASSEMBLY AND VF-129 BOARD

2 CRT socket (4P)
6 CRT assembly
5 Anode cable (1P)

4 High voltage Do not pull the cable,
cover but remove it in the
vertical direction.
3 Remove the high voltage
cover with a flat head
(–) screwdriver.
High voltage cover

7 VF-129 board
1 CRT DT connector (4P)
2-7
[VF-129, CD-281, MI-041 BOARDS SERVICE POSITION]
Adjustment remote
commander (RM-95)
CD-281 board
CRT assembly
VF-129 board
FP-263 flexible FFC-289 flexible

board (24P) flat cable (4P)
MI-
041
MI-041 board
CPC-jig
Info lithium battery (J-6082-521-A)
(L series)
Adjustment remote
commander (RM-95)
2-7. BATTERY PANEL SECTION (BATTERY TERMINAL BOARD)
1 Tripod screw
5 Claw
4 MI screw
(M2 × 4) (H)
2 Strap sheet
metal (lower)
7 Control switch block

(SS-1000) (5P)
1 MI screw
(M2 × 4) (H) 3 MI screw
(M2 × 4) (H)
3 Battery terminal board 2 Battery terminal board (7P)
6 Battery panel section
2-8
2-8. LENS SECTION
2 Flexible board
(from lens block)(24P) 1 Two tapping
screws (B2 × 5) 2 Lens frame
56
C -2
V ar d
Bo
1 FP-259 flexible
board (14P)
5 Claw
3 Screw 3 Lens section

(M2 × 3),
lock ace, p2
4 Two screws 6
(M2 × 3),
lock ace, p2
2-9. VC-256 BOARD

(FK-1000) (12P)
5 FP-258 flexible board
4 Jack cushion
8 VC-256 board
D
C
B 6
5 6 Screw (M2 × 3),
3 Two screws A -2
(M2 × 3), VCard lock ace, p2
lock ace, p2 Bo
D
C
B
A
1 Two screws (M2 × 3),

2 MD frame B lock ace, p2
2-9
[SERVICE POSITION TO CHECK THE VTR SECTION]
Connection to Check the VTR Section

To check the VTR section, set the VTR to the "Forced VTR power ON" mode.
Operate the VTR functions using the adjustment remote commander (with the HOLD switch set in the OFF position).
Setting the “Forced VTR Power ON” mode Exiting the “Forced VTR Power ON” mode
1) Select page: 0, address: 01, and set data: 01. 1) Select page: 0, address: 01, and set data: 01.
2) Select page: D, address: 10, set data: 02, and press 2) Select page: D, address: 10, set data: 00, and press
the PAUSE button of the adjustment remote the PAUSE button of the adjustment remote
commander. commander.
3) Select page: 0, address: 01, and set data: 00.
Note: If the machine malfunctions (the operating mode changes by itself), connect the FK-1000 block,
CF-1000 block.
When you eject the cassette,

connect Pin qa and Pin qs (GND) of
CN1008 on VC-256 board for 1 second.
CN1008
12 1
AC power
adaptor AC IN
Mechanism deck
Control switch block (FK-1000)
FP-258 flexible board
Battery terminal board
Audio 56
-2
VCard FFC-295 flexible
Bo VC-256 board
flat cable (24P)
Monitor TV
Control switch block
(CF-1000)
Video
A/V out jack

(L series)
CPC-jig
(J-6082-521-A)
Adjustment remote
commander (RM-95)
2-10
[SERVICE POSITION TO CHECK THE CAMERA SECTION]
Connection to Check the Camera Section

To check the camera section, set the camera to the "Forced camera power ON" mode.
Setting the “Forced Camera Power ON” mode Exiting the “Forced Camera Power ON” mode
1) Select page: 0, address: 01, and set data: 01. 1) Select page: 0, address: 01, and set data: 01.
2) Select page: D, address: 10, set data: 01, and press 2) Select page: D, address: 10, set data: 00, and press
the PAUSE button of the adjustment remote the PAUSE button of the adjustment remote
commander. commander.
Note: If the machine malfunctions (the operating mode changes by itself), connect the FK-1000 block,
CF-1000 block.
Control switch block (FK-1000) (12P)

When you operate the zoom, VC-256 board
connect the FK-1000 block to
CN1008 of VC-256 board. AC power
adaptor AC IN
Mechanism deck
Battery terminal board
FP-258 flexible board
Audio 56 Flexible board

-2
VCard (from lens block) (24P)
Bo
FP-259 flexible board (14P)
Monitor TV
Video
Lens block
A/V out jack
FFC-295 flexible
flat cable (24P)
Control switch block
Info lithium battery (CF-1000)
(L series)
Adjustment remote
commander (RM-95)
CPC-jig
(J-6082-521-A)
2-11
2-10.MECHANISM DECK
REMOVING THE MECHANISM DECK
4 Control switch block 6 Mechanism deck

(FK-1000) 1 Screw
(M2 × 3),
lock ace, p2
1 Three screws
(M1.7 × 2.5), p
2 absorbing
sheet
3 Three
5 MD sheet
2 Two claws dowels
4 MD frame A
2-11.HINGE SECTION
3 Electro luminous
element (4P)
5 Hinge blind,
Push switch REMOVING THE HINGE ASSEMBLY
(PR-10000)
5 Harness (PD-110)
3 Hinge cover M
4 Harness clamp
1 FP-260 flexible
board (16P)
2 Push switch (2P)
4 Three tapping
screws (B2 × 5) 1 Four
6 Screw claws
(M1.7 × 2.5), p
A
1 Four tapping
screws (B2 × 5) 2 Hinge
8 Hinge assembly cover C
2-12
2-12.CIRCUIT BOARDS LOCATION
CD-281
(CCD IMAGER)
CONTROL SWITCH BLOCK

(CF-1000)
PD-131
RGB, BACK LIGHT,
TIMING GENERATOR
MI-041
STEADY SHOT, MIC AMP,
IR DRIVE (TRV130 ONLY)
VF-129
(B/W EVF)
VC-256
CAMERA PROCESS, CAMERA Y/C PROCESS,
FOCUS/ZOOM DRIVE, EVR, DV SIGNAL PROCESS,
DV INTERFACE, DIGITAL REC/PB AMP, VIDEO OUT, HI CONTROL,
CAMERA/MECHA CONTROL, MECHANISM CONTROL,
DRUM/CAPSTAN MOTOR DRIVE, AUDIO PROCESS, DC IN,
CHARGE, DC/DC CONVERTER
2-13
2-13.FLEXIBLE BOARDS LOCATION
The flexible boards contained in the mechanism deck are not shown.
CONTROL SWITCH BLOCK CONTROL SWITCH BLOCK

(FK-1000) FFC-289 (SS-1000)
FP-258
(VIDEO LIGHT, S VIDEO)
FP-259
FFC-295
FP-263
FP-260
(PR-10000)
IRIS FLEXIBLE
ASSEMBLY 630
ELECTRO LUMINOUS ELEMENT

(BACK LIGHT)
2-14E
DCR-TRV130/TRV130E
SECTION 3
BLOCK DIAGRAMS
3-1. OVERALL BLOCK DIAGRAM (1/5) ( ) : Page No. shown in ( ) indicates the page to refer on the schematic diagram.
CD-281 BOARD VC-256 BOARD(1/4)

LENS ASSY
(4-33) SPCK
(4-32) SPCK(IC1501)
(4-8)
IRIS IC1502 IC2201
Q191
IC191 CN1501 CAMERA
68
CCD OUT S/H SIGNAL
7 BUFFER 1 14 30 Y0-Y7 Y0-Y7 TO
ZOOM MOTOR FOCUS MOTOR AGC 2 131 PROCESS
IRIS CCD (4-32) CLPOB A/D 61 OVERALL
METER AD1-AD10 FOCUS/
NIGHT M904 M M905 M IMAGER
1
PBLK
XSHP
CONV.
11 121 ZOOM
BLOCK
(2/5)
SHOT ZOOM FOCUS
H M 1 4 12 14 IC1501 2 XSHD
20 MOTOR 59
RESET RESET 14 1 31 16 CONTROL C0-C3 C0-C3 (SEE PAGE
V1-V4,RG,H1,H2 TIMING 15
SENSOR SENSOR 16
23 56 3-3)
GENERATOR
7 18 18 46 47 48
SPCK 70
CN191 HD,VD,OE HD,VD,OE
71
CN1551
21 14 12 8 5 4 1 20 23 SPCK SPCK 72
12 46
ZOOM FOCUS IRIS IRIS DRIVE(-) VCK
LENS FILTER ON SW
ZM RST
FC RST
42
A,B,XA,XB A,B,XA,XB HALL(-) 4
X1501
5 7 17 19 2 4 21 23 5 8 27MHz 5
44 HD,VD 110 54 XCS KINUTA
IC1551 (4-35) IC1552 45 111 (IC4902)
ZOOM FOCUS HALL IRIS 50
MOTOR MOTOR AMP DRIVE XCS KINUTA 39 38
VC SO,VC SI,XVC SCK
DRIVE DRIVE (4-35) (IC4902) 37
52
13 16 9 12 7 10 EN0,EN1
DIR0A,B 136
EN1 EN0 HALL IRIS PWM VC SO,VC SI,XVC SCK DIR1A,B
DIR1A DIR0A AD
DIR1B DIR0B XCS CH,CH SO,XCH SCK 144
IRIS PWM,HALL AD FC RST,ZM RST 137
FC RST,ZM RST 138
LENS FILTER ON SW
TO
OVERALL
MI-041 BOARD BLOCK(3/5)
(4-11) CN1002 PITCH AD,YAW AD (SEE PAGE 3-5)
SE751 CN753
PITCH AD
PITCH SENSOR 8 IC753 2 18 18
PITCH/YAW VSP SO,VSP SI,XVSP SCK
SE752
SENSOR YAW AD
YAW SENSOR 12 18 19 19
AMP IFI VD, IFI OE
VD, OE
MIC MIC L
1
902 L (4-11) MIC L VSP SO,XVSP SCK
CN751 2 9 21 21
19
IC752 12
MIC R
23 23
MIC MIC R MIC AMP
1 14 15
901 R
CN752 13 XCS AU
46
(4-54) (4-54)
(TRV130) (IC4501)
49
IC5401
D3901,3902 (4-13) 46 7 7 IR L,R IR L,R 62
AUDIO
IC5402
(LASER LINK) 48 6 6 63
AUDIO
IC3901 OUT
A/D CONV.
22 IR VIDEO DATA TO SFD
IR 42 4 4 L 25 L,R 3 D/A CONV. 8
(4-11) TRANSMITTER SIRCS PWM 54 DATA FROM SFD
18 15 15 23 2 9
R SFD BCK
55 12
IC751 7 1 1 IR FSC
(IC3301)
19 L,R 15
REMOTE 17 16
COMMANDER HP L,R 64
RECEIVER SIRCS XSIRCS SIG
1 16 16 2
SP+,- 8 TO
10 OVERALL
BLOCK(2/5)
CN1001
FP-258 Y
13
XCS TAKO
(IC4501)
(SEE PAGE
(FLEXIBLE)(1/3) J201
11 9 10 3-3)
S VIDEO C Y
(SEE PAGE 4-55) 15 18
C
14 (4-44)
V
J201 L
10 IC3701
8
A/V OUT (TAKO) Y CAIN Y
46
R V VIDEO
12 22 C CAIN C
OUT 7
IR V
CONTROL SWITCH BLOCK (CF-1000) CN1007
24
J001
(1/2) 4 21 HP L,R
HEAD PHONE
2 23
TO
SIRCS PWM OVERALL
SIRCS SIG BLOCK(4/5)
SP901 1 12 13 SP+,-
(SEE PAGE
SPEAKER 2 11 14
3-8)
CN003
(SEE PAGE 4-27)
16
3-1 3-2

DCR-TRV130/TRV130E
J202
DV IN/OUT
VC-256 BOARD(2/4) (4-37)
138
X3301
IC3301 139
24.576MHz
(CAIN) CN1001
199 201 (4-40) TPA+,-
DV SIGNAL 142 45 6 1
TO
Y0-Y7 Y0-Y7
203
207
205
211
PROCESS L BUS IC3303 TPB+,-
OVERALL 145 42 (LIP) 9 5

213 215
BLOCK(1/5)
TRCK DV INTERFACE 29
1 3 51 47
(SEE PAGE C0-C3 C0-C3 LCK MC BUS
FP-258(2/3)
5 7 141 79
3-2) 37
(FLEXIBLE)
17 151 VREF RF MON
HD, VD, OE HD,VD,OE 9 CN1011(1/2)
21 SWP
23 152 (SEE PAGE 4-55) 16 FOR
PRRV,TRRV,TRRT ADJUSTMENTS
SPCK 153 DRUM
156
DATA TO SFD ODD
133 (4-42)
DATA FROM SFD
132
127
SFD BCK IC3103 CN3101 FLYING
ERASE
REC CK REC CK (TRW) 6 ODD 5
99 40
REC DT REC DT 7 4
97 42 REC/PB
AMP 2 EVEN 7
1 8
34
Q3123
(4-41) Q3111,3116
IR FCS 182 83 AD DT AD DT 15 PB Y OUT
42 27
6 6 6 IC3101 FLYING
ERASE 11
EVEN
88 20 (TRF) OSC
48 PB CK
81 EQ
(SEE PAGE
ATF ERR PB CK
79 13 A/D CONV. 35 4-30)
8 PLL
HD
20 VD 184 170
25 31 4
IC3302 19 183 MC BUS 22 24 IC3102
179
CHARACTER (4-41) XFE ON
GENERATOR COL0
18 195 159 2 SWP
17 COL3 194 VSP SO, SI, SCK XCS TRF SWP
(IC4501)
(4-39) 16 191 161
14 190 DV RF SWP
163 XCS SFD (IC4501)
1 3
162 XCS VFD (IC4501) ATF ERR
ERRV,TRRV,TRRT
PANEL G
75
PANEL R
73 DRP SO,XDRP SCK
71 PANEL B
TO
OVERALL BLOCK
105 PANEL XHD,XVD
(3/5)
106 MC BUS
(SEE PAGE 3-5)
VSP SO,VSP SI,XVSP SCK

CAIN Y Y
55 BW Y
CAIN C C 67
TO 59
OVERALL
BLOCK(1/5) DATA TO SFD
VC SO,VC SI,XVC SCK
(SEE PAGE DATA FROM SFD
3-2) SFD BCK
XCS OSD
OSD SO
XOSD SCK VF-129 BOARD DY
TO
OVERALL H V
BLOCK DH1,DH2
HI SO, XHI SCK 3
(4/5)
T901,902 4
(SEE PAGE 3-8) CN902
BL CONT
HV
5
G2
2 H
Q902
3
(4-36) W901
H OUT
IC1601 DV1,DV2 1
3 ADJUSTMENT D/A CONV.
VOLTAGE 2
4 (EVR) 27
VC SO,VC SI,XVC SCK CN902
5 28
XCS LCD
10
(IC4803) 15 DA STB(IC4902)
TO
V901
OVERALL
BLOCK(5/5) CRT
(PD-131) 9
HI SO, XHI SCK 16 5 3
(SEE PAGE 11 BW Y EVF Y G1
3 3 11 CRT DRIVE 13 1
3-9) W901
CN1006
7 PANEL XHD,XVD IC901 (4-25)

8
BL CONT
17
CN1003
16
3-3 3-4

DCR-TRV130/TRV130E
VC-256 BOARD(3/4) M2000 MECHA DECK

(4-52) (SEE PAGE 4-30)
(4-50) (4-52)
M901
78 DRUM PWM DRUM PWM
IC4401 DRUM ERROR
IC1301 Q1306
DRUM VS
CN4402
DRUM MOTOR
DRP SO,DRP SI,XDRP SCK 79
IC4501 68 28 (3/3) 29 15 (1/2) 58 SWITCHING 6 IC4401 61
U, V, W
10
80 DIGITAL8 CAP PWM CAP PWM LPF CAP ERROR PWM

(1/3) 59 M
69 25 27 11 64 SWITCHING 57 5
MECHA DRIVE DRUM
74 CONTROL Q1305
MOTOR
VSP SO,VSP SI,XVSP SCK 75 SIGNAL (4-59) DRIVE
76 PROCESS
CONTROL
26 DRUM FG
16 FG AMP 17 3 DRUM FG
MC BUS
37 DRUM PG
22 PG AMP 20 1 DRUM PG
106 (4-52)
FRRV,TRRT,TRRV DRUM FG
107 116
DRUM PG
108 117 M902
ATF ERR 115
IC4402 CN4403 CAPSTAN MOTOR
95 CAP FG 5 14
110 CAP VS U,V,W
109 3 CAPSTAN 7 M
DEW AD MOTOR 9 9
96 DRIVE HU1,2
XCS VFD (IC3301) 17 16 HV1,2 7
TO XCS SFD (IC3301) 38 39 HW1,2
OVERALL MODE SW A-C HU,HV,HW
BLOCK(2/5) XCS TAKO (IC3701) 18 40 21 2
2 3 4
41
(SEE PAGE XCS EEP LOAD
88 CAP FG 22 FG1,2 18
3-4) IC4502 49 UNLOAD 24 FG AMP
23 16
CAPSTAN FG
EEPROM 50
1 XCS AU (IC5401) 21 DEW AD
XCS TRF (IC3101) 23 22 DEW SENSOR
(4-50) VREF (IC3301) 112
21 S901
DV RF SWP MODE SW A-C
62 TAPE END MODE SWITCH
XFE ON 54
59 19
SWP TAPE TOP (4-52)
60 53
T REEL FG
XCS MECHA (IC4803) 72 114
IC4401 CN4401 M903
S REEL FG LOADING MOTOR
81 113 LOAD (2/3) 2
UNLOAD 55 53 LM(+),LM(-)
VC SO,VC SI,XVC SCX
HI SO,HI SI,XHI SCX 82
TAPE LED ON 56 LOADING 51 M
83 55 MOTOR 1
DRIVE D001
REC PROOF
1 44 TAPE
TAPE END TAPE END(C) Q002 LED
TAPE END TAPE END
47 46 14
DETECT SENSOR
(4-48)
TAPE TOP TAPE TOP TAPE TOP(C) Q001
VSP SO,VSP SI,XVSP SCK 44 45 15 TAPE TOP
DETECT SENSOR
X4901
2 IC4902
20MHz T REEL FG
1 CAMERA 41 T REEL 38 T REEL(+),(-) 7 T REEL
CONTROL H001
FG AMP 39 6 SENSOR
VC SO,VC SI,XVC SCX
LINE OUT V (IC3301) 114
S REEL FG
33 S REEL 36 S REEL(+),(-) 9 S REEL H002
FG AMP 35 10 SENSOR
2 3 4 78 CAP FG
115
VC SO,VC SI,XVC SCX 79 Q4401
IC4901 80
TAPE LED ON
LED DRIVE 13
EEPROM S001
XCS KINUTA (IC2201) 19 REC PROOF
(4-47) 3 REC PROOF
1 DA STRB (IC1601) 21 ME SW
4 ME/MP
HI8 MP SW
XCS EEPROM 2 HI8 MP
27 XCC DOWN
1 C.C. LOCK
S002
CN4404
TO IFI OE V LIGHT PWM
IFI VD 111 71
OVERALL
BLOCK(1/5) 113
(SEE PAGE
3-2)
Q1001,1002 VIDEO LIGHT
83
XCS CH,CH SO,XCH SCK
82 VIDEO
81 LIGHT 19
DRIVE 20
CN1001
IRIS PWM
74 VL UNREG
FP-258
HI SO,HI SI,XHI SCX 75 38
ME SW (FLEXIBLE)
76
40
HI8 MP SW (3/3)
HALL AD
XCS VC (IC4803) 78
FC RST ZM RST (SEE PAGE 4-55)
ZM RST 23
LENS FILTER ON SW FC RST
IRIS PWM 24
PITCH AD 70 LENS FILTER ON SW
43
YAW AD
HALL AD
84
87 PITCH AD
HI SO,HI SI,XHI SCK 97
TO YAW AD
OVERALL 98
BLOCK(4/5)
(SEE PAGE
XCC DOWN
3-8)
ZOOM VR AD
16
3-5 3-6

DCR-TRV130/TRV130E
CONTROL SWITCH BLOCK (CF-1000)(2/2) VC-256 BOARD(4/4) (4-46)

(SEE PAGE 4-27) IC4803
HI CONTROL
S007 CN001 CN1007

DIAL A
DIAL B 18 7 67 DIAL A
SEL/PUSH 17 8 68 DIAL B
EXEC XCS MECHA 80 XCS MECHA (IC4501)
MENU EXEC
DIAL XCS VC 3 XCS VC (IC4902)
24 1 93 KEY AD0
KEY AD2-KEY AD4
23 2 XCS LCD 27 XCS LCD (IC5501, 5502)
22 3 KEY AD0, KEY AD1 97 KEY AD4
FUNCTION
SW 40 20MHz OUT XCC DOWN
X4801 XCC DOWN 18 TO
CN002 20MHz 41 20MHz IN OVERALL
SUPER NIGHT SHOT BLOCK(3/5)
4 52 32kHz IN HI SO, HI SI, XHI SCK
SW (4-45) X4802
(SEE PAGE
32.768kHz
53 32kHz OUT ZOOM VR AD
CN009
IC4801 3-5)
PANEL
SIRCS SIG
OPEN/CLOSE 1 TO
RESET 5 38 XRESET
SW HI SO 33 OVERALL
42 BLOCK(1/5)
LI 3V HI SI 34 HI SO, HI SI, XHI SCK
19 6 3
VDD SWITCH
51 VDD HI SCK 35 (SEE PAGE
BT001 6 SIRCS, PWM
(4-28) LITHIUM VTR UNREG 7 77 3-2)
BATTERY 87
BATT UNREG
L901
CN004 IC003 SIRCS SIG 4 XCS OSD
6 Q002,003 OSD SO
1
EL 5 4 EL XOSD SCK TO
BACK LIGHT 2 16 9
(BACK LIGHT) 2 5 OVERALL
DRIVE 10 BLOCK(2/5)
1 20 5 78 LCD LED ON Q4806, 4805
HI SO, HI SI, XHI SCK (SEE PAGE
SIRCS ENV 59
MOD
5 20 MELODY 36 3-4)
(4-27) S001 BL CONT
XOSD SCK 24 LCD COM/XDATA
RESET OSD SO CAM DD ON 28
LCD902 CN003 IC001 LCD COM/XDATA
60 XCS LCD DRIVER
VTR DD ON 29
1 11 7 6 19
LCD INDICATOR XCS LCD DRIVER 46 XOSD SCK
INDICATOR DRIVE 45 OSD SO
16 30 10 8 16 BATT/EXT SW 66
44 XCS OSD FAST CHARGE 50
INIT CHARGE ON 25 BL REG
D 1.9V (2/2)
S001
D 2.8V
PANEL 1 KEY AD5 AU 2.8V IC1301
REVERSE 2 2 98 KEY AD5
SW 2 DC/DC
CN5701 CN1003 A 2.8V
CN5702 1 LANC IN CONV.
A 4.75V
CONTROL SWITCH 2 LANC OUT
AU 4.75V
BLOCK (PR-10000) PD-131 BOARD(1/2) Q4804
48 IB SI
RP 4.75V
(SEE PAGE 4-19) I/F MT 4.75V
79 IB SO
B/W EVF 4.75V
EVF 2.8V
19 XPHOTO FREEZ RP 2.8V
CONTROL EVF PANEL 4.75V
SWITCH START/STOP XS/S SW
CN009 PANEL -15.3V
CAM -6.5V
4 16 XS/S SW BT901
BLOCK SW
CAM 12V
CN701
D 1.5V Q702
(SS-1000) POWER
XVTR MODE SW
XCAM MODE SW
2 14 XVTR MODE SW RP 6.0V
Q701
6
DC IN
SW 1 15 XCAM MODE SW CHARGE 2
(SEE PAGE 4-45) SW
(4-59) 3
BATT UNREG
XEJECT SW 4 +
EJECT SW 11 17 XEJECT SW BATTERY
7 S
CONTROL 5 –
TERMINAL
ZOOM VR AD
SWITCH ZOOM VR 1
FAST CHARGE
BLOCK PHOTO SW
XPHOTO FREEZE
4 BATT SIG BATT/EXT SW
(FK-1000) KEY AD0
BATT SIG
VTR FUNCTION KEY AD1 7 INIT CHARGE ON
(SEE PAGE 4-56)
SW 5
16 CN1008
CN1011(2/2) LANC IN
4
FOR LANC OUT
6
ADJUSTMENTS
3-7 3-8

DCR-TRV130/TRV130E
PD-131 BOARD(2/2) PANEL ID

6
R5522 HD OUT
8
1.5k PANEL COM
4 CN5502
5 FOR
VR,VG,VB ADJUSTMENTS
3
1
PANEL R
LCD901
PANEL G
PANEL B
3 48 IC5501 20 19 T5601
VR,VG,VB
4 47 RGB 22 20 ND901 Q5602
5 46 DRIVE 24 21 BACKLIGHT
2.5 INCH 10 INVERTER BL REG
LCD UNIT BL HIGH
41 COM VCOM BACK
27 11
40 LIGHT
XCS LCD (4-19) 35
DA DRIVE
10 39
5 (4-21)
TO
OVERALL
44
10 IC5602
BLOCK IC5502 13
15 BL LOW
3 3 CURRENT 4
(2/5) 46 DET
(VC-256) 9 TIMING CN5601
HI SO,XHI SCK 45 GENERATOR 18
11 24
(SEE PAGE 42
Q5601
CN5501
3-3) PANEL XHD
7 1 4
PANEL XVD
48
(4-19)
8
2 8 5
HD OUT BL DET
5 2
(4-21) IC5601 7
BL CONT
17 1
CN5701 6 PANEL 2.8V
3-9 3-10

DCR-TRV130/TRV130E
3-6. POWER BLOCK DIAGRAM (1/2) ( ) : Page No. shown in ( ) indicates the page to refer on the schematic diagram.
VC-256 BOARD
DC PACK SW
BT901 BATT SIG
BATTERY BATT/EXT SW
TERMINAL CN701 F001
BATT UNREG
4
DC PACK SW Q702-704
1
CHARGE
CONTROL INIT CHARGE ON BATT SIG
BATT SIG
7
BATT/XEXT SW
BATT GND
5 Q701 FAST CHARGE
FAST CHARGE DC PACK SW
INIT CHARGE ON
BATT/EXT
3 BATT UNREG
L701
ACV UNREG F004 BL REG UNREG
6
ACV GND F005 VL UNREG

2
Q1310-1311
F003 C/D VSD1.5V MT 4.75V
DC IN 4.75V REG
F002 VTR UNREG VTR UNREG
(4-59)
L1306 D 2.8V D 2.8V
IC1301 (1/2)
Q1304
SWITCHING L1302
DC/DC CONVERTER L1307 A 2.8V A 2.8V
L1308 AU 2.8V AU 2.8V

OUTPUT-1 45
MOS GATE-1 42
Q1307 L1309 EVF 2.8V
SWITCHING
28 VCC
OUTPUT MONITOR-1 40 L1324 RP 2.8V D 1.9V
Q1303
SWITCHING L1305 L1310
D 1.5V
22 CT +1.5V REG
21 RT OUTPUT-4 57 IC1304 Q1331,1332

MOS GATE-4 54 (4-60)
Q1308
SWITCHING
OUTPUT MONITOR-4 18
D1301
Q1322,1324
PANEL -15.3V
T1301 RECT -15.3V REG
2
OUTPUT VCC 7 5 D1302 Q1315,1316
Q1301 CAM -6.5V POWER(2/2)
OUTPUT VCC 1,2,3 49 SWITCHING 3 -6.5V REG
4 (SEE PAGE
3-13)
COMP 41
1 Q1321,1323,1327
CAM 12V
5 +12V REG
6
OUTPUT-3 50 Q1314
RP 2.8V
EMERGENCY (4-60)
7
DETECT
D1306
8 2 IC1303 3
RP 6.0V
5
6V REG
OUTPUT MONITOR-3 34
FB1301 PANEL 13.3V

Q1302
SWITCHING L1301
L1312 EVF PANEL 4.75V EVF PANEL 4.75V
L1313 AU 4.75V AU 4.75V

PD-131 BOARD OUTPUT-2 46
L1314 A 4.75V A 4.75V
OUTPUT MONITOR-2 37
(4-19) (4-19)
L1316 RP 4.75V RP 4.75V
IC5501 IC5502
Q1309
LCD TIMING SWITCHING
DRIVE GENERATOR L1317 L1318
BL REG
CAM DD ON
LCD901
PANEL 13.3V VGH OUTPUT-7 2
15 1
PANEL 4.75V VSH
14 24 OUTPUT MONITOR-7 6
PANEL -15.3V VGL
16 3 LCD
PANEL BL CONT
MONITOR INPUT-7 7
PANEL 2.8V VDD
13 23
CN5501
IC5601 STANDBY-3 29
VTR DD ON
IC5602 (4-21) STANDBY 30

BL REG BACK ND901
18 BL HIGH
BL CONT LIGHT 10 BACK
17 DRIVE LIGHT STANDBY-7 31
CN5701 CN5601
VREF 27
SERVO BLOCK
DRUM/CAPSTAN
PANEL 2.8V
PWM DRIVE 13
Q1305,1306 PANEL 4.75V
14
DRUM VS PANEL 13.3V
15
OUTPUT VCC 4,5,6 1 CAP VS PANEL -15.3V
SWITCHING 16
BL CONT
17
BL REG
18
CN1003
16
3-11 3-12

DCR-TRV130/TRV130E
3-7. POWER BLOCK DIAGRAM (2/2) ( ) : Page No. shown in ( ) indicates the page to refer on the schematic diagram.
VC-256 BOARD CN1009

S001
XCAM+STBY SW POWER
1
XVTR MODE SW CAMERA
2
CONTROL SWITCH
OFF (CHARGE)
BLOCK (SS-1000)
VCR/PLAYER (SEE PAGE 4-49 )
(4-46)
IC4803
BATT SIG
MODE CONTROL CN1007 CN001
LI-3V
6 19 BT001
BATT/XEXT SW LCD LED ON (4-28)
LITHIUM
FAST CHARGE 14 XVTR MODE SW Q002,003
BATTERY
DC PACK SW 15 XCAM+STBY SW
INIT CHARGE ON
IC003
VTR UNREG
BATT UNREG 9 16 EL BACK LIGHT
90 BATT SENS DRIVE
91 ACV SENS
42
D 2.8V
VL UNREG 51 10 15 SWITCH
V OUT 6 77 VDD CAM DD ON 28
7 V IN (4-27)
RESET 5 86 VTR DD ON 29
MT 4.75V
VRO 8
EVER 3.0V
87 DC PACK SW 47 EVER 3.0V
IC001
3 V BATT 11 14
VTR UNREG D4801 CS 4 FAST CHARGE 50 LCD INDICATOR
38 RESET BATT/EXT 66 DRIVE
61 BATT IN
IC4801 (4-45) INIT CHARGE ON 25
Q4804
INITIAL RESET, BACKUP VCC XHI RESET
48 IB SI 20 5
D 2.8V I/F
49 IB SO EVF DD ON 10 S001
RESET
A 2.8V
(4-45) (CF-1000) (SEE PAGE 4- 27)
AU 2.8V
IC4804
CHARGER D4806
CN1008
2 3 D 2.8V
2 ZOOM VR
D 1.9V
(4-39)
D 1.5V
IC3302 (4-50) 6 SWITCH
(4-44) (4-32) CONTROL SWITCH

CHARACTER (4-37) (4-40)
IC3701 GENERATOR IC1502 IC4502 R1004
8 LED
BLOCK (FK-1000)
(SEE PAGE 4-60 )
VIDEO (4-33) S/H.AGC. IC3301 IC3303 EEPROM
OUT
AMP
IC2201 A/D CONV.
(CAIN) (LIP)
DV DV (4-50) CN1002
A 2.8V
(4-36) CAMERA PROCESS, (4-32) SIGNAL INTERFACE 14 14
PROCESS
CAM -6.5V IC1601
FOCUS/ZOOM MOTOR
CONTROL IC1501 IC4501 SE751,752
POWER(1)
(SEE PAGE D/A TIMING
MECHA
CONTROL AU 2.8V
IC752 IC753 PITCH, YAW
SENSOR
3-12) CONV. GENERATOR 13 13
PITCH, YAW
MIC AMP
(EVR) SENSOR AMP
CAM 12V
RP 2.8V
(4-11) (4-11)
VL UNREG
A 4.75V
MT 4.75V 12 12
RP 6.0V D 2.8V
A 2.8V (4-11) (4-13)
AU 2.8V
D3901,3902
FB3303 VTR UNREG LASER LINK
IC751 IC3901
D 1.9V 5 5
LED REMOTE IR
D 1.5V CN753 COMMANDER TRANSMITTER
CAM -6.5V RECEIVER
CAM 12V
(TRV130)
(TRV130)
EVF PANEL 4.75V EVF PANEL 4.75V
MI-041 BOARD
AU 4.75V AU 4.75V
A 4.75V A 4.75V
RP 2.8V
RP 6.0V
RP4.75V RP 4.75V RF 1.9V
EVF PANEL 4.75V
VTR UNREG
(4-52) L3102 (4-35)

(4-54)
CAM DD ON IC4402 (4-48) (4-47) L3103 IC5401 IC1552
IC4901 IRIS DRIVE
CAPSTAN IC4902 AUDIO
HALL AMP
OUTPUT
MOTOR CAMERA EEPROM
DRIVE CONTROL SPEAKER
(4-35)
V LIGHT PWM 71
AMP IC1551
VTR DD ON VL UNREG
FOCUS/ZOOM
IC3103 IC3101 IC5402 MOTOR DRIVE
EVF DD ON
R1554
(TRW) (TRF) AUDIO
DRUM MOTOR
ADC&DAC Q1317,1319
DRIVE, Q1001,1002
REC/PB EQ
LOADING
MOTOR DRIVE,
AMP A/D CONV. (4-54) V LIGHT PWM VIDEO
PLL LIGHT
SENSOR AMP
DRIVE
(4-42) (4-41)
IC4401
R4411,4455 R4407 (4-52)
CN4404 CN4403 CN1551 CN1501 CN1001 CN1006
16 12 8 17 24 15 10 12 20 19 1
VL UNREG BW EVF 4.75V

ZOOM 5 3 1
LENS CN191 CN901
T REEL,
H001
CAPSTAN
VF-129 BOARD
S REEL, MOTOR
CCD
FP-258(FLEXIBLE)
SENSOR H002 M902
IMAGER IC191 (SEE PAGE 4-55) CRT
(4-8) IC901 DRIVE
(4-25)
M2000-MECHA (SEE PAGE 4-30) CD-281 BOARD
VIDEO LIGHT
3-13 3-14E

DCR-TRV130/TRV130E
SECTION 4
PRINTED WIRING BOARDS AND SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS
4-1. FRAME SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM (1/2)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
A CD-281 BOARD CONTROL SWITCH BLOCK(FK-1000)

RV001
S001-011
ZOOM
W-T
LENS UNIT CCD EJECT/ LIGHT/PHOTO(PHOTO FREEZE)

S012
IMAGER STOP/ PAUSE/ FF / REW/

PLAY/ REC D001
14P
SUPER
CAM_-7.5V
CAM_15V
CCD_OUT
LASER
LINK
CN191
VSHT
GND
GND
GND
RG
H1
H2
V4
V3
V2
V1
14
13
12
11
10
9
6
5
4
3
2
1
C FP-259 FLEXIBLE
M2000 MECHANISM
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
10
11
12
13
14
10
11
12
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
2
3
4
5
6
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
M903
LOADING
ZOOM_VR
MOTOR
NC
REG_GND
REG_GND
FC_XA
FC_XB
FC_B
FC_A
ZM_XA
ZM_ZB
ZM_B
ZM_A
ZM_SENSE_VCC
PLA/GLASS
FC_SENSE_VCC
FC_SENSE_OUT
GND
ZM_SENSE_OUT
TEMP
TEMP
BIAS(+)
HALL(+)
BIAS(-)
HALL(-)
NIGHT_SHOT
CONT(+)
DRIVE(-)
DRIVE(+)
V4
V3
V2
V1
GND
RG
H1
H2
GND
CAM_-7.0V
VSHT
CAM_15V
GND
CCD OUT
KEY_AD1
KEY_AD0
XEJECT_SW
XIR_LED_ON
D_2.8V
XPHOTO_FREEZE
D_2.8V
LED_2.8V
CN4401 2P
1 LM(-)
M 2 LM(+)
CN1008 12P
CN1551 24P
D CN1501 14P
CN4402 10P
PG 1 PG
FG-PG_COM 2 FG-PG_COM
FG 3 FG
M901
DRUM COM 4 COM
MOTOR CN1011 20P
W 5 W 1 VCO
FG
FP
PG M W 6 W 2 XLANC_POWER_ON
V 7 V 3 EVF_BL
E V
U
8 V
U
4 LANC_IN
9 5 EVF_BL_4.75V
U 10 U 6 LANC_OUT
VC-256 BOARD(1/2) CPC
7 EVF_VG
TO FH(2/2)
CN3101 11P
1/15 CAMERA PROCESS 8 NC
GND 1 GND 8/15 HI CONTROL
2/15 CAMERA Y/C PROCESS 9/15 CAMERA MECHA CONTROL (FOR CHECK) 9 RF_MON
GND 2 GND 3/15 FOCUS/ZOOM DRIVE,EVR 10/15 MECHANISM CONTROL
10 REG_GND
GND 3 GND 4/15 DV SIGNAL RPOCESS 11/15 DRUM/CAPSTAN MOTOR DRIVE
5/15 DV INTERFACE 12/15 AUDIO PROCESS 11 REG_GND
FE SP1(X) 4 XODD(SP1X) 6/15 DIGITAL REC/PB AMP 13/15 DC IN,CHARGE
F SP1(Y) 5 YODD(SP1Y)
7/15 VIDEO OUT 14/15 CONNECTOR
15/15 DC/DC CONVERTER
12 REG_GND
13 NC
FP
GND 6 GND
14 NC
SP2(X) 7 XEVEN(SP2X)
SP1 VIDEO SP2 15 RF_IN
HEAD SP2(Y) 8 YEVEN(SP2Y)
16 RF_SWP
GND 9 GND
17 TMW
FE(Y) 10 FE(Y)
18 TCK
FE(X) 11 FE(X)
19 TDO
G CN4403 22P
20 TDI
VH- 1 VH-
FP-228 Hw2 2 Hw2

20P
24P
Hw1 3 Hw1
FLEXIBLE
Hv2 4 Hv2
CN1001
M
CN1002
FG Hv1 5 Hv1
XF_TALLY_LED
VST_C_RESET
AUDIO_R_I/O
AUDIO_L_I/O
UNREG_GND
UNREG_GND
XS_JACK_IN
VTR_UNREG
XSIRCS_SIG
Hu2 6 Hu2
RF_DC_OUT
RF_DC_OUT
XWIND_ON
V_JACK_IN
VL_UNREG
VL_UNREG
VIDEO_I/O
IR_R_OUT
PITCH_AD
IR_A_DEV
IR_V_DEV
IR_L_OUT
REG_GND
REG_GND
REG_GND
REG_GND
REG_GND
REG_GND
REG_GND
REG_GND
REG_GND
IR_VIDEO
IR_CARR
DEW
YAW_AD
AU_2.8V
SE_GND
A_4.75V
Hu1 7 Hu1
S_C_I/O
S_Y_I/O
IR_FSC
SENSOR
A_2.8V
H
MIC_R
MIC_L
IR_ON
M902 VH+ 8 VH+

NC
CAPSTAN
MOTOR Coil-W 9 CAP_V
20
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
2
1
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
Coil-W 10 CAP_V
FP
coil-V 11 CAP_W
Coil-V 12 CAP_W
FP-229 Coil-U 13 CAP_U
FLEXIBLE Coil-U 14 CAP_U FP-263 FLEXIBLE
GND(COM) 15 REG_GND
I MR
SENSOR Vo2 16 FG2 FP-258 FLEXIBLE
VIDEO
24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
Vcc 17 FG VCC LIGHT

S901 Vo1 18 FG1
YAW_AD
REG_GND
REG_GND
REG_GND
XWIND_ON
SE_GND
VTR_UNREG
MIC_R
MIC_L
IR_ON
IR_CARR
IR_R_OUT
PITCH_AD
IR_A_DEV
IR_V_DEV
IR_L_OUT
IR_FSC
VST_C_RESET
AU_2.8V
A_2.8V
A_4.75V
IR_VIDEO
XSIRCS_SIG
MODE
XF_TALLY_LED
C 19 M-SW(C)
SWITCH
B 20 M-SW(B)
24P
A 21 M-SW(A)
DEW 22 DEW
CN753
J
G
C
CN4404 J201
15P
C_LOCK_SW 1 C_LOCK_SW
S VIDEO
Q001
FP-300 OUT
MI-041 BOARD
Y
TAPE TOP HI8_MP 2 HI8_MP CN201 4P

G
FLEXIBLE REC_PROOF 3 REC_PROOF 4 TPA 1/2 STEADY SHOT,MIC AMP CN751 2P

MIC901
2/2 IR
LS-057 BOARD ME/MP 4 ME/MP 3 NTPA
DV IN/OUT
INT_MIC_L
MIC_GND
1
2
MIC
INT_MIC_L
S001 HALL_COM 5 HALL_COM 2 TPB

A/V OUT
ME/MP
REC PROOF T_REEL(-) 6 T_REEL(-) 1 NTPB
Hi8 MP H001,002 T_REEL(+) 7 T_REEL(+)
K S002 S-REEL SENSOR
SENSOR_VCC 8 SENSOR_VCC
CN752 2P
MIC901
FP
C.C.LOCK T-REEL SENSOR INT_MIC_R 1 INT_MIC_R

S_REEL(+) 9 S_REEL(+) MIC
MIC_GND 2
S_REEL(-) 10 S_REEL(-)
FP-301 FP-302 REG_GND 11 REG_GND

IC3901 D3903
SE752 SE751
IR YAW PITCH
FLEXIBLE FLEXIBLE TAPE_LED(A) 12 TAPE_LED(A) SIRCS
SENSOR SENSOR
TAPE END TAPE_LED(K) 13 TAPE_LED(K)
Q002
TAPE_END(C) 14 TAPE_END(C)
TAPE END
TAPE_TOP(C) 15 TAPE_TOP(C)
L
16 FRAME SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM (1/2)

4-1 4-2

DCR-TRV130/TRV130E
FRAME SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM (2/2)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
D901
EL
A LCD 902
CHARACTER DISPLAY
ND901
BACK LIGHT
LCD901
2.5 INCH COLOR LCD UNIT
B
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
8
7
6
4
3
2
1
5
8
9
BL_GND
N.C
EL
EL
N.C
N.C
COM3
COM4
SEG14
SEG13
SEG12
SEG11
SEG10
COM2
COM1
SEG9
SEG8
SEG7
SEG6
SEG5
SEG4
SEG3
-EL
-EL
CONTROL SWITCH
BLOCK (CF-1000)
10
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
1
2
5
6
7
8
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
8P
CN006 16P
LED_GND
LED
BL_LOW
N.C
N.C
N.C
N.C
N.C
N.C
BL_HIGH
VGH
GND
VGL
VGLAC
SPS
EX1
MO1
MO2
PSG
EX2
VCOM
CLS
RES
PSS1
PSS2
CTR
CLD
SPD
VR
VG
VB
GND
VSH3V
VSH5V
CN004
24P
+
10P
BT001
S001-004,006,009 LITHIUM BATTERY
CN5601
CN5501
012,013,015,016,018,019, S007
022
SEL/PUSH EXEC
J001 CONTROL SWITCH
CN5702 6P
(HEADPHONES) CN5502 10P BLOCK
RESET/MENU/TIME/EXPOSURE/
1 VB
PANEL_REV 1
(PR-10000)
SUPER NIGHT SHOT/END SEARCH/ PANEL_REV 2
D DISPLAY/VOLUME+/ZOOM PB/ PD-131 BOARD 2 XVD_OUT
VG
N.C. 3
3
VOLUME-/BACK LIGHT/FOCUS/ 1/2 RGB,TIMING GENERATOR N.C. 4
4 PANEL_COM
FADER 2/2 BACK LIGHT GND 5 S001
CPC 5 VR
GND 6 (PANEL REVERSE)
6 PANEL_ID
(FOR CHECK)
20P
24P
CN003 2P 7 C-SYNC/XHD
SP901 1 SP(+) 8 XHD_OUT

CN5701
XCHARGE_LED_ON
SPEAKER
CN001
XCS_LCD_DRIVER
HEADPHONE_GND
LCD_COM/XDATA
2 SP(-) 9 GND
HEADPHONE_R
HEADPHONE_L
PANEL_-15.3V
E PANEL_HOLD
LCD_LED_ON
XCS_LCD_DA
PANEL_13.3V
PANEL_4.75V
10 GND
HP_JACK_IN
VTR_UNREG
CN009 2P
PANEL_2.8V
S901
PANEL_XVD
XHI_RESET
XOSD_SCK
EVER_3.0V
SP+(BEEP)
XSYS_RST
REG_GND
REG_GND
BL_CONT
XVC_SCK
PANEL_G
PANEL_R
KEY_AD2
KEY_AD3
KEY_AD4
PANEL_B
(OPEN/CLOSE) 1 OPEN/CLOSE
OSD_SO
BL_GND
SE_GND
BL_GND
BL_REG
C-SYNC
DIAL_A
DIAL_B
D_2.8V
VC_SO
LI_3V
2 GND
AD5
SP-
24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
20
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
8
7
6
3
2
FFC-295 PD-110
F FLAT CABLE HARNESS
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
20
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
1
2
8
7
6
5
3
2
1
XSYS_RST
REG_GND
KEY_AD2
KEY_AD3
KEY_AD4
BL_GND
LCD_LED_ON
LI_3V
DIAL_A
DIAL_B
VTR_UNREG
D_2.8V
EVER_3.0V
XCHARGE_LED_ON
SP+(BEEP)
SP-
REG_GND
XCS_LCD_DRIVER
OSD_SO
XOSD_SCK
XHI_RESET
HEADPHONE_L
HP_JACK_IN
HEADPHONE_R
HEADPHONE_GND
AD5
SE_GND
BL_GND
VC_SO
LCD_COM/XDATA
BL_REG
BL_CONT
XVC_SCK
PANEL_G
PANEL_R
PANEL_HOLD
XCS_LCD_DA
C-SYNC
PANEL_XVD
PANEL_B
PANEL_2.8V
PANEL_13.3V
PANEL_4.75V
PANEL_-15.3V
24P
20P
G
CN1003
CN1007
TO FH(1/2) VF-129 BOARD FTB
VC-256 BOARD(2/2) G1 1
FFC-256 H 2
CN1006 4P
FLAT CABLE CN901 4P
H 3
H XTALLY_LED 4 1 EVF_4.6V
N.C.
G2
4
5
BW_EVF_Y 3 2 EVF_GND
W901 5P
EVF_GND 2 3 BW_EVF_Y
EVF_BL/BW_EVF_4.75V 1 4 XTALLY_LED
CN902 4P
DV1 1
I DV2 2 V901
CRT
DH1 3
CONTROL SWITCH BLOCK CN1009 5P DH2 4
(SS-1000) S001
1 XCAM+STBY_SW
(TRV130) VCR
S002 2 XVTR_MODE_SW CN701 7P
(TRV130E) PLAYER
3 REG_GND DCPACK_SW 1
OFF(CHARGE) 4 XS/S_SW ACV_GND 2 DP-77
5 REG_GND BATT/XEXT 3 HARNESS DC IN
J START/STOP CAMERA POWER
BATT_UNREG 4
BT901
BATT_GND 5
BATTERY
ACV_UNREG 6 TERMINAL
BATT_SIG 7
16
FRAME SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM (2/2)

4-3 4-4

DCR-TRV130/TRV130E
4-2. PRINTED WIRING BOARDS AND SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS
THIS NOTE IS COMMON FOR WIRING BOARDS AND SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS

(In addition to this, the necessary note is printed in each block)
(For printed wiring boards) (Measuring conditions voltage and waveform)

• b: Pattern from the side which enables seeing. • Voltages and waveforms are measured between the measure-
(The other layers' patterns are not indicated.) ment points and ground when camera shoots color bar chart of
• Through hole is omitted. pattern box. They are reference values and reference wave-
• Circled numbers refer to waveforms. forms. *
• There are few cases that the part printed on diagram isn’t (VOM of DC 10 MΩ input impedance is used.).
mounted in this model. • Voltage values change depending upon input impedance of VOM
• Chip parts. used.) *
Transistor Diode
C 65 4 45 6 4 5 1 2 3 3 3 1. Connection
Pattern box
B E 12 3 32 1 32 1 54 3 2 1 2 1 2 1
(For schematic diagrams)
• All capacitors are in mF unless otherwise noted. pF : m mF. 50V
or less are not indicated except for electrolytics and tantalums.
• Chip resistors are 1/10W unless otherwise noted.
kW=1000W, MW=1000kW.
• Caution when replacing chip parts. 1.5 m
New parts must be attached after removal of chip.
Be careful not to heat the minus side of tantalum capacitor, Be-
cause it is damaged by the heat.
• Some chip part will be indicated as follows.
Example C541 L452
22U 10UH
TA A 2520
Front of the lens

Kinds of capacitor
Temperature characteristics
External dimensions (mm)
2. Adjust the distance so that the output waveform of Fig. a and
• Constants of resistors, capacitors, ICs and etc with XX indicate the Fig. b can be obtain.
that they are not used.
In such cases, the unused circuits may be indicated. H
Yellow
Magenta
• All variable and adjustable resistors have characteristic curve B,

White
Cyan
Green
unless otherwise noted.

Red
• Signal name
Blue
XEDIT → EDIT PB/XREC → PB/REC

• 2 : non flammable resistor
• 1 : fusible resistor
• C : panel designation
• A : B+ Line *
• B : B– Line *
•J : IN/OUT direction of (+,–) B LINE. *
A B A=B B A
• C : adjustment for repair. * Fig. a (Video output terminal output waveform)
• Circled numbers refer to waveforms. *
* Indicated by the color red.
Electron beam
Note : Note :
scanned frame
The components identified by Les composants identifiés par
Magenta
Green
Yellow
White
Cyan
Blue
mark 0 or dotted line with mark une marque 0 sont critiques

Red
0 are critical for safety. pour la sécurité. CRT picture frame

Replace only with part number Ne les remplacer que par une
specified. pièce portant le numéro spécifié.
Fig.b (Picture on monitor TV)
When indicating parts by reference number, pleas include

the board name.
4-5

DCR-TRV130/TRV130E
CD-281 (CCD IMAGER) PRINTED WIRING BOARD

— Ref. No. CD-281 Board; 1,000 Series —
1 2 3 4 5 6
CD-281 BOARD NO MARK:REC/PB MODE

R :REC MODE
CCD IMAGER P :PB MODE
A -REF.NO.:1000 SERIES-
XX MARK:NO MOUNT
CN191 14P
1
V4
V3
14
13 2 IC191
CCD IMAGER
V2 12
V1 11
B TO GND 10
VC-256 BOARD(1/15)
CN1501 RG 9
R-4.7/P0
R-4.7/P0
R-0.2/P0
R-0.2/P0
R-7.6/P0
3
R9.2/P0
THROUGH H1 8
THE FP-259
FLEXIBLE H2 7 C196
47u R194
GND 6 10V 0
(SEE PAGE 4-31) CAM_-7.5V 5
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
GND
V4
V3
V2
V1
CCD_OUT
NC(VL)
VSHT 4
CAM_12V 3 IC191
C GND 2
ICX089AK-43
ICX091KA-43
:TRV130
:TRV130E
CCD OUT 1 R195

XX 4
VL(CSUB)
SHT(SUB)
5
IC191 *
DGND
VDD
H2
H1
RG
14 13 12 11 10 9 8
For printed wiring board
R1.4/P0
R1.6/P0
R9.9/P0
R-5.0/P0.4
R7.7/P0
R12.0/P0
• Refer to page 4-69 for parts location. CD-281
• CD-281 board consists of multiple layers. However, only (CCD IMAGER) D
the sides (layers) A and B are shown.
• Chip parts
R192 R198 C197
0 0 0.1u
CONTROL SWITCH BLOCK B
Transistor (CF-1000)
C193
C XX
B
PD-131
RGB, BACK LIGHT,
TIMING GENERATOR
E SIGNAL PATH L191
100uH
C195
0.1u
R12.0/P0
B E MI-041 F
(STEADY SHOT, MIC AMP, IR DRIVE) VIDEO SIGNAL
Q191
There are a few cases that the part printed on CHROMA Y Y/CHROMA C191
2SC4178-F13F14-T1
BUFFER
22u
this diagram isn’t mounted in this model. R191 16V
R9.2/P0
REC 0
1608 R8.5/P0
PB
R193
3.3k
1608
6 C194
XX LND191
Precautions Upon Replacing CCD imager

• The CD-281 board mounted as a repair part is not equipped
with a CCD imager.
When replacing this board, remove the CCD imager from the
G old one and mount it onto the new one.
• If the CCD imager has been replaced, carry out all the
adjustments for the camera section.
• As the CCD imager may be damaged by static electricity from
its structure, handle it carefully like for the MOS IC.
16 In addition, ensure that the receiver is not covered with dusts
nor exposed to strong light.
H
CCD IMAGER
CD-281 4-7 4-8

DCR-TRV130/TRV130E
MI-041 (STEADY SHOT, MIC AMP, IR DRIVE) PRINTED WIRING BOARD

— Ref. No. MI-041 Board; 20,000 Series —

• Refer to page 4-69 for parts location.
• MI-041 board consists of multiple layers. However, only
• Chip parts
Transistor
C
B E
There are a few cases that the part printed on

this diagram isn’t mounted in this model.
CD-281
(CCD IMAGER)

(CF-1000)
PD-131
RGB, BACK LIGHT,
TIMING GENERATOR
MI-041
(STEADY SHOT, MIC AMP, IR DRIVE)
STEADY SHOT, MIC AMP, IR DRIVE

4-9 4-10 MI-041

DCR-TRV130/TRV130E
For Schematic Diagram

• Refer to page 4-9 for printed wiring board.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
MI-041 BOARD(1/2)
STEADY SHOT,MIC AMP
C810
A -REF.NO.:20000 SERIES- XX
XX MARK:NO MOUNT
IC753
NO MARK:REC/PB MODE NJM3230V(TE2) :TRV130
R :REC MODE C772 C777
UPC6756GR-8JG-E2 :TRV130E
R785
P :PB MODE C762 0.056u 0.056u R782 15k
22u 25V 25V
6.3V B B C784 10k
22u
6.3V R783 C789
1M 0.33u
R1.4/P1.2
16V
B
2012
B
0.7
0.9
1.3
1.3
1.3
1.3
1.3
RB751
D752 22k
MA111-(K8)SO. C763
0.1u 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
SE751 2 3 10V
IC751
GND
AM1
HO1
OUT1
LO1
PASS
B
HI1
LIB1
LIA1
PITCH Vref GND

Vref1
SENSOR
REMOTE COMMANDER IC753
RECEIVER *
Vref2
4.6
LIB2
LIA2
OUT2
CRST
Vcc out
LO2
HI2
HO2
AM2
VCC
1 4
IC751 2 1
PNA4S13MO2SO :TRV130 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
*
RS-180-T :TRV130E C768

0.056u
C
IC751
0.7
0.9
1.4
1.4
1.3
1.3
1.3
R1.2/P1.2
2.8
25V
B
SE752
3 4 YAW
SENSOR
4.7
C774 C775
0.056u 22u D753
RB752 25V 6.3V TLSU1008(T05,SOY)
22k B
1 4 R797 (TALLY)
1800 CN753 24P
Vcc out IC753 R779
1M 24 XF_TALLY_LED
SENSOR AMP 23 MIC_R

C759 R784
0.1u 22 REG_GND
MA111-(K8).S0
D754 Vref GND 10V XX

D R780
D755
MA111-(K8).S0 D756 B
2 3 10k C787 21 MIC_L
XX XX
LND751 B 20 SE_GND
2012
SEIDEN 19 YAW_AD
MIC901 C758
22u
CN752 2P 6.3V 18 PITCH_AD
INT_MIC_R 1 17 VST_C_RESET
MIC
GND 2 C770 16 XSIRCS_SIG
C808 C791 TO
0.047u 0.01u C794
10u B 16V 10u 15 XWIND_ON/SIRCS_PWM VC-256 BOARD(13/15)
6.3V B 6.3V CN1002
14 A_2.8V
E MIC902
CN751 2P
L751
10uH 13 AU_2.8V (THROUGH
FLEXIBLE
THE FP-263
)
C764 ± 10%
INT_MIC_L 1 0.01u
C776
R775 C781
0.015u
12 A_4.75V (SEE PAGE 4-55)
MIC B 4.7k
GND 2 0.1u B 11 IR_ON
1005
B
R776 C782 10 IR_A_DEV
0 0.015u
B 9 IR_V_DEV
R766 8 IR_CARR
R774
5.6k 18k
7 IR_L_OUT
6 IR_R_OUT
C785
F 0.022u
B
R788
33k
5 VTR_UNREG
4 IR_VIDEO
R767 R769
R757 5.6k 6.8k C788 3 REG_GND
2200 0.022u
B 2 REG_GND
2.8
1 IR_FSC
1.4
1.4
1.4
1.4
1.4
1.4
1.4
1.4
C796
C800 XX VTR_UNREG
20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10u B
BH7871FV-E2
C799
G 6.3V A_4.75V
MTX_AMP_OUT_R
AMP_OUT_R
VCC
MTX_AMP_OUT_L
MTX_AMP_IN_R
0.22u
HPF_OUT_R
IN_R
SUB_SIG_OUT_R
R_OUT
BIAS
SUB_SIG_OUT_L
HPF_ON/OFF
MTX_AMP_IN_L
B REG_GND
SIGNAL PATH
XL_CH_SLEEP
AMP_OUT_L
HPF_OUT_L
REG_2.5V
VIDEO SIGNAL IR_FSC

L_OUT
IC752
IN_L
GND
AUDIO IR_VIDEO
IC752
CHROMA Y Y/CHROMA SIGNAL IR_R

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 MIC AMP
TO(2/2)
REC IR_L
1.4
2.4
1.4
1.4
1.2
1.2
1.1
0.5
(TRV130)
IR_CARR
PB
6.8k
5.6k
H C761
0.01u
IR_V_DEV
C786
0.022u
B R786 IR_A_DEV
R764
R768
0
SIRCS_PWM
C783 R789
R765 5.6k
0.022u 33k IR_ON

B
R770
0.068u B
R761 18k
0.1u B
2.2k
C769
C779
C773
C809 R771 0.01u

47u 0 B
6.3V
C780
I R772
4.7k
0.015u
B
16
STEADY SHOT, MIC AMP

MI-041 (1/2) 4-11 4-12

DCR-TRV130/TRV130E

• Refer to page 4-65 for waveforms.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
MI-041 BOARD(2/2) NO MARK:REC/PB MODE

R :REC MODE
IR DRIVE P :PB MODE NO MARK:IR ON/IR OFF MODE
A -REF.NO.:20000 SERIES- ( ) :IR ON MODE
XX MARK:NO MOUNT R3924
[ ] :IR OFF MODE
L3906 0
10uH 2012
200mA
VTR_UNREG
R3927
*
2012 C3933
C3932 0.1u
4.7u
A_4.75V B
L3902 16V
1005
10uH C3912
C3914
10u 0.01u
B REG_GND
6.3V B
1005
D3903
C3911 C3913
R3930 0.01u *
R3901 R3904 510p C3918 D3902
XX R3931 B
(TRV 130) 33k 12k 1005
CH 8p C3921 C3923 DCS2815 (IR)
12k CH 33p 39p (LASER LINK)
L3903 CH (NIGHT SHOT)
IR_CARR CH
R3908 5.6u D3901
C3909
0.01u 330 2520 L3905 CL310IRS
R3902 L3904 (LASER LINK)
4700 B 33uH
1005 R3909 33uH 2520
IR_V_DEV 1k 2520
C3904 R3912
0.01u C3910 680 C3917 R3919
R3903 16V 4.7u 0.1u 1500 R3948
33k B 6.3V B
C 1005 TA A 1005
*
2.7
0.7
4.7
IR_A_DEV
0
0
Q3901
36 35 34 33 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 2SA1774HT2
(3.8)/
[4.5] LED DRIVE
CLAMP C2
CAR ADJ
PRE EM IN
PRE EM OUT
VCC
VCC
NC
V GND
V GND
HPF OUT
V REF
VRF IN
C3901 (4.5)/ (5.3)/

1u [0] Q3903 [6.4]
3.4
B (1.2)/ 2SD1664-T1
1608 4.7 R3921 [0] LED DRIVE Q3904
48 47 46 45 44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37
13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
CLAMP C1 DRV CL OUT 470 *

Q3902 (0.6)/ LED DRIVE
D 0
NC
IC3901
NC 0
2SA1037AK
LED DRIVE
R3922 (1.2)/ [0]
TO(1/2)
C3902
XX
4V
V DEV ADJ 2 DRV EM OUT
0
0 [0]
TA A NC IR TRANSMITTER DRV SW (0.6)/

2.4 0 [0]
IR_VIDEO
C3907 0
V IN 3 IC3901 MIX OUT
R3917 C3929
C3930
C3931
R3929 R3925
C3934
*
1u AN2920FHQ 0.01u R3920 * * B
B REG NC 470 22u B 0.01u 1005
0 4V 470 1/10W 1/10W
B R3926
NC MIX IN C3926 TA 1005 2012 2012
0.3 1005 *
R3915 0.01u
B
A
C3905 REF NC 560 1005
0.47u 0.2 0
B A DEV ADJ VRF OUT
0 0
E IR_L
0 Lch IN ARF OUT 0
R3916
6800
R3923
*
0 ALC C 1 STBY
0
IR_R C3935
Rch IN CHUP C 0.01u SIGNAL PATH
[ALC OUT Rch]
[ALC OUT Lch]
C3906
B
0.47u
[OSC OUT]
BAND SEL
B
OSC VCC
X’tal SEL
VIDEO SIGNAL
X’tal IN
A GND
A GND
AUDIO
REF R
LPF R
LPF L
RB3901
4.6
C3903
5.6k
XX
R3946 CHROMA Y Y/CHROMA SIGNAL
39k
6.3V
TA A 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 PB
4.7
F
0
C3908 R3907 *MARKED:MOUNT TABLE

1u 22k R3945 R3913 R3914
XX
± 0.5% 1608 150k TRV130 TRV130E
B 150k
R3905 C3915 C3925
1M 0.01u 0.1u C3934 0.1u XX
B B
1005 1005 D3903 XX CL-310IRS-X-TU
C3924 Q3904 XX 2SC4617HT2L
C3916 C3919 C3920 C3922 1u
IR_FSC 1u 0.47u 0.47u 1u B R3923 XX 470
B B B B
SIRCS_PWM R3925 10 120
R3926 18 XX
G IR_ON R3927 XX 0
R3929 XX 120
16
R3948 XX 0
IR DRIVE
4-13 4-14 MI-041 (2/2)

DCR-TRV130/TRV130E
PD-131 (RGB, TIMING GENERATOR, BACK LIGHT) PRINTED WIRING BOARD

— Ref. No. PD-131 Board; 30,000 Series —

• Refer to page 4-69 for parts location.
• PD-131 board consists of multiple layers. However, only
• Chip parts
Transistor
C 65 4 1 2
B E 12 3 54 3

CD-281
(CCD IMAGER)

(CF-1000)
PD-131
RGB, BACK LIGHT,
TIMING GENERATOR
MI-041
(STEADY SHOT, MIC AMP, IR DRIVE)
RGB, TIMING GENERATOR, BACK LIGHT

PD-131 4-15 4-16

DCR-TRV130/TRV130E
RGB, TIMING GENERATOR, BACK LIGHT

4-17 4-18 PD-131

DCR-TRV130/TRV130E

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
PD-131 BOARD(1/2) FB5502 0uH

A RGB,TIMING GENERATOR
L5502 C5527 C5509 C5510 C5513
-REF.NO.:30000 SERIES- 10uH 0.01u 3.3u 0.01u 0.1u C5514
22u
B 1005 50V B B
XX MARK:NO MOUNT 1005 6.3V
1005 TA
NO MARK:REC/PB MODE
R :REC MODE
1.4 COM_FRP
FRP
BGP
BLK
R5505
P :PB MODE R5531 15k
XX
13.6
0.7
1.7
1.1
2.7
0.2
1.4
6.8
4.7
B 36 35 34 33 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25
SIGNAL PATH
VIDEO SIGNAL
R_INJECT
EXT_DA1
N.C
BGP
BLACK_IN
GND3
FRP
COM_FRP
N.C
COM_OUT
Vcc3
Vcc2
DAC
CN5701 20P REG_GND CHROMA Y Y/CHROMA

SE_GND 20 SE_GND
BL_GND 19 BL_GND
1 TO(2/2)
1.6
6 2.3
REC
37
24
EXT_DA2 VB C5517
BL_REG 18 BL_REG 0.1u PB
XC.SAVE 2.8 1.7 B 1608
38
23
BL_CONT 17 BL_CONT XC.SAVE B_DC_DET
C PANEL_-15.3V 16 XVC_SCK 2.5 2.3
39
22
TO
VC-256 BOARD(13/15)
CN1003
PANEL_13.3V 15
XTG_SO 2.7
XSCK
5 VG
1.7 B
C5518
0.1u
1608
40
21
(SEE PAGE 4-56)

PANEL_4.75V
PANEL_2.8V
14
13 XCS_PANEL 2.8
SI IC5501 G_DC_DET
2.3
41
20
XCS LCD DRIVER VR

REG_GND 12
XVC_SCK
L5501
10uH
R5501
470k 2.8 4 1.7 RB5501
42
19
XVC_SCK 11 R5523 100

XCS_PANEL Vcc1 R_DC_DET
0 IC5501 C5519
XCS_LCD_DA 10 2.8 RB5P003AM1 0.1u R5516
XVC_SO C5503 10k
43
18
0.1u B
C5501 C5526 R5524 TRAP_ADJ GND2 1608
VC_SO 9 B
XVD XX
D 10u
R5502 1005
XX 1.1
44
17
PANEL_XVD 8 4V
SYNC TA XX C5525 LPF_ADJ GND1
R5503
C-SYNC/XHD 7 100k XX 2.8 4.7
HOLD XP.SAVE
3
45
16
± 0.5%
6 XP.SAVE VSH
PANEL_HOLD
1.8 13.6
46
15
PANEL_B 5
C5505 0.01u B_IN Vcc4
PANEL_G 4 1.9
2
47
14
C5506 0.01u C5520

PANEL_R 3 G_IN N.C
10u
C5507 1.8 16V
48
13
AD5 2 0.01u
XSYS_RST R_IN N.C
XSYS_RST 1 1
E
OP_OUT
R5702 R5703 CN5501 24P

OP_IN+
OP_IN-
10k XX
BIAS
24 VSH
VCO
C5522 C5523 C5521

N.C
N.C
N.C
N.C
N.C
N.C
N.C
0.1u 0.1u 1u
B B B 23 VDD
CONTROL SWITCH 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
1005 1005
22 VSS
BLOCK 21 VB
1.4
1.4
1.4
1.5
3.1
(PR-10000) 20 VG
19 VR
S001 R5506 C5512 R5512
0.1u D5502 TG24
(PANEL REVERSE) 2700 100k 18 HCNT
C5511
CN5702 6P B 1T369-01-T8A
F
560p
TG23
CH
1005 LCD901
PANEL_REV 1 17 MCLK
R5508 C5515 2.5 INCH
68k TG22
R5510
PANEL_REV 2 FB5501 R5507 0.001u 16 CLR LCD COLOR

68k
OuH 47k R5511 C5516 UNIT

R5509 SL 220p TG21
N.C. 3 1M 15 OE
22k L5503 50V
C5504 27uH TG20
C5502 0.1u CH
N.C. 4 XX ± 5% 14 SRT
B R5513 TG19
16V D5503 R5525
GND 5 1005 XX XX 0 13 STBYB
TG12
GND 6 12 VBC
11 VCOM
R5539 TG18
0 10 RESET
G XSYS_RST
R5535
56
TG17
9 STBYB
TG16
8 GSRT
CONTROL SWITCH BLOCK(PR-10000) is replaced as TG15
a block so the PRINTED WIRING BOARD is omitted. 7 GPCK
TG14
XP.SAVE
XC.SAVE
C5529 R5504 6 GRES

0.1u 100k R5534 C5528 TG13
B XX XX 5 N.C.
1005
4 VDD
3 VGL
2.8
2.8
2.8
1.4
2.8
1.4
1.3
2.8
D5501 C5524
XX R5528 1u 2 VSS
H 36 35 34 33 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25
0 B
1 VGH
R5526
470k
POCB
SYF
OUT/TESTO
+IN/TESTO
-IN/TESTO
GND
PS/VDD
PD
OSCI
OSCO
XC.SAVE
DR.P.SAVE
R5514 C5530
0 R5530 XX C5531
Q5501 C5508 XX
0.1u 1608 0
2SC4617HT2L 10V
B Q5503
Q5502 XX
BGP 2.7 0.1 TG24 XX RB5503
37
24
XX
BGP
8 HCNT/SPD
1.2 TG23
SWITCH
S
38
23
SWCOM MCLK/CLD
I BLK 0.1 1.4 TG22

C5532
XX
S
39
22
R5532
SW CLR/CTR XX RB5502
FRP 1.4 2.8 TG21 R5527 XX
40
21
FRP OE/PSS2 R5533 XX

XX
COM_FRP 1.4
IC5502 2.3 TG20
41
20
COM_FRP SRT/PSS1 R5515

XX
XVC_SCK 2.5 TIMING GENERATOR 1.4 TG19
42
19
XSCK VDD/RES Q5505

IC5502 xx
2.8 CM7020L1-E2 0 TG18 S Q5504
43
18
VDD/TESTI RESET/EX2 XX
R5520
2.8 2.8 0
XCS_PANEL TG17
J
44
17
XCS STBYB/PSG
XTG_SO 2.7 2.8 TG16
45
16
SO GSRT/MODE2
R5529
XVC_SO 0.2 2.8 TG15 0
46
15
SI GPCK/MODE1
2.8 2.8 TG14 CN5502 10P
47
14
VSYB GRES/EX1 1 VB
XVD 2.8 2.8 TG13 XVD_OUT
48
13
XVD CP/SPS 2 XVD_OUT

CPMODE/CLS
3 VG
GND/TESTI
TESTI/GND
K 4 PANEL_COM
BL-DET
BL-ON
R5518
TESTI
TESTI
PWM
R5522 5 VR
HDB
W/H
0
LED
HDI
1608 1500
CPC
6 PANEL_ID
SYNC
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 7 C-SYNC/XHD
7 XHD_OUT
8 XHD_OUT
(FOR CHECK)
0.2
2.7
2.8
2.8
2.8
R5519
SYNC XX TG12 9 GND
HOLD 10 GND
R5517
XHD_OUT
XVD_OUT
220k
1608
L
SYNC
BL_ON
R5521 LED 2 TO(2/2)
47k
DETIN
16
RGB, TIMING GENERATOR

PD-131 (1/2) 4-19 4-20

DCR-TRV130/TRV130E

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
PD-131 BOARD(2/2)
BACK LIGHT L5601
100uH R5601 R5604
A -REF.NO.:30000 SERIES- 1800 1800
XX MARK:NO MOUNT
5
NO MARK:REC/PB MODE
R :REC MODE 1
P :PB MODE ET5601
XX
2 6 ET5602
XX
C5603
0.015u 3
B CN5601 10P
4.6
4.6
B 2 1
C5608
XX
4 10
C5606
10 BL_HIGH
ND901
9 N.C
BL_REG -0.5 B T5601 12pF BACK LIGHT
3 5 3kV
INVERTER SL 8 N.C
C5607 -0.5 TRANSFORMER
Q5602 4520 7 N.C
4.7u 4
C5602 FP216-TL
B XX
3216 INVERTER DRIVE 6 N.C
B
5 N.C
BL_GND
4 N.C
IC5602 R5605
XX 3 BL_LOW
C PANEL_4.75V
BL DET.
Q5603
XX
D5602
2 LED
XX 1 LED_GND
PANEL_2.8V
R5602 R5611
100k XX
2.8 VCC 0.33
5
D5601
1
2
TO(1/2) 1SS355TE-17
2.8 2.2 R5610
R5608 Note : Note :
4
0
XX
R5603
C5604 C5605
12k
R5606 0.1u R5607

IC5602 0.1u 22k 470
B B mark 0 or dotted line with mark une marque 0 sont critiques
D D5603
XX
TA75S393F-TE85R
1005 1005
0 are critical for safety. pour la sécurité.
DAC
R5609
XX
SE_GND RB5601
D5604 10K IC5601
XX TC7W53FU(TE12R)
1.6 VCC 2.8
BL_CONT
1
COM
0 CH0 1.6
E IC5601
2
C5601 INH
XX
REG_GND 1005 2.8
CH1
3
DETIN VEE BACK LIGHT

2.8 0 BRIGHT SWITCH
BL_ON A
4
GND
2 TO(1/2)
Q5601
DTC144EHT2L
SWITCH
LED LD5605
A
16
BACK LIGHT
4-21 4-22 PD-131 (2/2)

DCR-TRV130/TRV130E
VF-129 (B/W EVF) PRINTED WIRING BOARD

— Ref. No. VF-129 Board; 1,000 Series —
8
6
5
1
4
For printed wiring board VF-129

• Refer to page 4-70 for parts location. (B/W EVF)
• VF-129 board consists of multiple layers. However, only
• Chip parts
Transistor
C
B E VC-256
CAMERA PROCESS, CAMERA Y/C PROCESS,
FOCUS/ZOOM DRIVE, EVR, DV SIGNAL PROCESS,
There are a few cases that the part printed on DV INTERFACE, DIGITAL REC/PB AMP, VIDEO OUT, HI CONTROL,
CAMERA/MECHA CONTROL, MECHANISM CONTROL,
this diagram isn’t mounted in this model. DRUM/CAPSTAN MOTOR DRIVE, AUDIO PROCESS, DC IN,
CHARGE, DC/DC CONVERTER
B/W EVF
VF-129 4-24

DCR-TRV130/TRV130E

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13
VF-129 BOARD T902 XX
B/W EVF 2
A -REF.NO.:1000 SERIES- 1
XX MARK:NO MOUNT
3
NO MARK:REC/PB MODE
R :REC MODE Q904
2SD1819A-QRS-TX
P :PB MODE VIDEO DRIVE
4
7
4.6 -12.3
L902 5
R918 33uH
4700 ± 5% 6 8
3225
B C908
27p
Q903 R919
CH
2SA1163G-TE85L 68k W901 5P
VIDEO AMP 2.3 T901 F.B.T
R921 1 G1
1.8 6.8
R920 3 2 H
R927 22k
1k R928 2 3 H
CN901 4P 3300 -11.7
TO HV 4 N.C.
VC-256 BOARD(13/15) EVF_4.75V 1 4
L901 5 G2
CN1006 Q902 47uH
EVF_GND 2 R901 R904 2SD1615-T1GLGK 3225
C THROUGH THE FFC-256
FLAT CABLE
BW_EVF_Y 3
470
R902
10k
H OUT
4.4
5
7
250V
XTALLY_LED 4 470
(SEE PAGE D901
R903
1.8k
C909 2200V
MA111-(K8).S0
0.4 C910 C911 6
4-55) PR1102W-TR 2012 C901 0.001u C912
DUMPER
68u B 4700p 6800p 68u
(TALLY) 6.3V C902 2012 SL SL 6.3V D903 1 8
TA R906 TA C916
0.1u 0.001u
C F 1500 C
0.4
SOL901 500V
2012 R905
1200
-25V
R923 RV904 R924 R925
1M 470k 2.7M 2.7M
C903 C905 Q901
0.47u 33u 2SD1819A-QRS-TX
25V C904 6.3V BRIGHT
4.9V DETECTOR
D TA
A
1500p
B
TA
B
C914
1.5u
35V
R922
270k R926
1k
R911 TA
27 A
R910
15k 3216
5 R909
10k
4
C915
0.022u
B
2012
C913 C906 L903 V901
0.47u 1u
F HLC
R907
100k
25V
TA
A
3216
R912
1M
IC901 DEFLECTION YOKE
R908
G2
G1
390k VIDEO AMP
1.8
1.6
4.3
2.0
E
2.3
6 CN902 4P
16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 1 DV1
H
2 DV2
H PICTURE TUBE
H OSC
BA7149F-E2
AFC
AMP/MIX
(M01KXX90WB)
H DRIVE
3 DH1
VIDEO
SYNC SEP
V SYNC
SEP
4 DH2
IC901
HV
F V OUT V OSC
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
SIGNAL PATH
2.1
2.0
2.1
4.6
2.0
1.3
R915 R929 Note : Note : VIDEO SIGNAL

1k
22k
C907
3 The components identified by
mark 0 or dotted line with mark
Les composants identifiés par
une marque 0 sont critiques CHROMA Y Y/CHROMA
0.1u
R917
0 are critical for safety. pour la sécurité. REC
R916 *
TRV130 27k Replace only with part number Ne les remplacer que par une
G 1
R914
XX ± 0.5%
TRV130E
± 0.5%
specified. pièce portant le numéro spécifié. PB
R913 R917
XX R930 R931 68K: TRV130
TH901 3.3 1 82K: TRV130E
XX
2 RV903
470
R932
4700 V SIZE
H 16
B/W EVF
4-25 4-26 VF-129

DCR-TRV130/TRV130E
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
CONTROL SWITCH BLOCK(CF-1000) S007
A SWITCH,INDICATOR DRIVE CN005 12P

R004
10k
R003
10k
R002
10k SEL/PUSH EXEC
XX MARK:NO MOUNT 1 KEY_AD2
2 KEY_AD3
3 KEY_AD4
CN001 24P
4 DIAL_A
KEY_AD2 24
5 OPEN/CLOSE SW
KEY_AD3 23
6 DIAL_B
KEY_AD4 22
7 D_2.8V
BL_GND 21
D001
B LCD_LED_ON 20 R005
8
9
EVER_3.0V
XCHARGE_LED_ON
TLAU1008(T05,SOY)
(CHARGE LED)
150
LI_3V 19 CH GND
10 REG_GND
DIAL_A 18 S002 S004 LND002
TO 11 REG_GND S001 S013 S016 S018
VC-256 BOARD(13/15) DIAL_B 17 MENU R006 EXPOSURE R010 R013 R016 R019 R022
12 XHI_RESET RESET S010 VOLUME+ VOLUME- BACK LIGHT
CN1007 1200 1500 2200 XX 3900 8200 27k CH GND
VTR_UNREG 16
BT001 LND003
D_2.8V 15
(THROUGH THE LITHIUM BATTERY
FFC-295 FLAT CABLE)
D005
D007
D006
EVER_3.0V 14
XX
XX
XX
(SEE PAGE XCHARGE_LED_ON 13

S901
C 4-56)
SP+ 12 CN006 2P
OPEN/CLOSE
SP- 11 1 OPEN/CLOSE SW
REG_GND 10 2 REG_GND
XCS_LCD R007 S005 R011 R014 R017 R020 S017 R023
XCS_LCD_DRIVER 9 1200 3900 27k
COM/XD XX 1500 2200 8200 XX
LCD_COM/XDATA 8
OSD_SO
OSD_SO 7
XOSD_SCK
XOSD_SCK 6
XHI_RESET 5
D HP_L_OUT 4
HP_JACK_IN 3
HP_R_OUT 2
HEADPHONE_GND 1
S003 S006 S009 S012 S022 S019

R008 R012 R015 R018 S015 R021 R024
TIME NIGHT SHOT 1500 END SEARCH DISPLAY FADER FOCUS
1200 2200 3900 XX 8200 27k
R052
0
Q002
2SA1576A-T106-R R026
180k
SWITCH
10 9 8 7 6
R029
F
GND
33
VCC
ENB
RT2
RT1
R030
390
R033 C002
C003 L002
IC003
MIP806
Q003 XX XX
2SD1819A-QRS-TX B 10u
SWITCH 10V EL DRIVE
R031
IC003
GND
0
_EL
CIL
DC
EL
R032 R034
100k
G 560 1 2 3 4 5 R027
0 CN004 8P
1 -EL
2 -EL
3 N.C
C004 D901
4700p 4 N.C
EL
L004 200V
100uH 5 EL
L003
0uH D004 6 EL
MA1010000LS0
C008 VDR002 7 N.C
C007 VDR001
H J001
XX
B
0.001u
B 8 BL_GND
(HEADPHONES)
SEG14
SEG13
SEG12
SEG11
CN003 16P
R001 COM1
0 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 16 COM1
COM2
15 COM2
SEG18
SEG17
SEG16
SEG15
SEG14
SEG13
SEG12
SEG11
SEG3
LND001 14 SEG3
SEG4
SEIDEN 13 SEG4 LCD902
I 2P
R009
680k
SEG5
12 SEG5 CHARACTER
CN003 SEG10 SEG6 DISPLAY
SEG10
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
1
SP901 11 SEG6
OSC1
SPEAKER SP(+) 1
IC001 SEG9 SEG9 SEG7
2
10 SEG7
SP(-) 2 OSC2
SEG8 SEG8 SEG8
3
LCD DRIVE 9 SEG8

VSS
D002 SEG7 SEG7 SEG9
C001
4
XX IC001 8 SEG9
0.1u VC BU9735K-E2
SEG6 SEG6 SEG10
B
5
7 SEG10
VLCD
SEG5 SEG5 SEG11
6
6 SEG11
XOSD_SCK VDD
SEG4 SEG4 SEG12
7
5 SEG12
SCK
J OSD_SO
SEG3 SEG3 SEG13
8
4 SEG13
SD
SEG14
3 SEG14
COM4
2 COM4
COM1
COM2
COM3
COM4
SIGNAL PATH COM3

SEG1
SEG2
C/XD
1 COM3
XCS
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
AUDIO
SIGNAL XCS_LCD CONTROL SWITCH BLOCK(CF-1000) is replaced as a block.
COM1
COM2
COM3
COM4
So the PRINTED WIRING BOARD is omitted.

K REC COM/XD
PB
16

(CF-1000) 4-27 4-28

DCR-TRV130/TRV130E
LS-057 (S/T REEL SENSOR), FP-228 (DEW SENSOR), FP-299 (MODE SWITCH), FP-300 (TAPE TOP), FP-302 (TAPE END), FP-301 (TAPE LED) FLEXIBLE BOARDS
FP-300 FLEXIBLE (COMPONENT SIDE) FP-302 LS-057 BOARD FP-300

FLEXIBLE FLEXIBLE
Q002
Q001
TAPE END
TAPE TOP
FP-301 1 TAPE TOP (C)

FLEXIBLE 2 TAPE END (C)
D001 3 TAPE LED (K)
Q001 TAPE LED
4 TAPE LED (A)
TAPE TOP 5 GND
1-680-436-
SENSOR 6 S REEL (-) TO
7 S REEL (+) MECHA
H002 3 CONTROL
2 8 SENSOR (Vcc)
1 15 S REEL BLOCK
SENSOR 9 T REEL (+)
1 4
10 T REEL (-)
11 HALL COM
ME/MP
12 ME/MP
REC PROOF
11 H001 13 REC PROOF
2 3 Hi8 MP
T REEL 14 Hi8 MP
1 15 LS-057 BOARD 1
SENSOR
4
S001
15 C LOCK SW
15 1
(CONDUCTOR SIDE)
S002 D001 S002
C.C. LOCK
S001 C.C. LOCK
REC PROOF TAPE LED
FP-299 S901
FLEXIBLE FP-299
MODE SWITCH
1 DEW
o'
2 A
M902 FLEXIBLE 3 B
CAPSTAN 4 C
MOTOR H001
1 5 FG1 (Vo2)
T REEL
MR 2 6 VCC
SENSOR SENSOR
FG2 (Vo1)
DEW SENSOR
3 7
4 8 GND (C0M)
9 COIL-U
10 COIL-U
TO
1-680-437-
11 COIL-W
FP-228 M902 MECHA
CAPSTAN 12 COIL-W CONTROL
FLEXIBLE MOTOR
13 COIL-V BLOCK
MR SENSOR 14 COIL-V
11
1 15 VH+
4 16 HU 1
FP-301 FLEXIBLE 3
HE
2
17 HU 2
DEW SENSOR 4 1 18 HV 1
(CONDUCTOR SIDE) 19 HV 2
3 2 20 HW 1
HE 21 HW 2
4 1
22 VH-
1-677-049- 11
3 2
FP-228 H002 FP-302 FLEXIBLE 4

HE
1
S REEL
FLEXIBLE (CONDUCTOR SIDE)
1-680-434-
SENSOR
o'
C 1-680-473- 11
11
B
A
COM
1-680-438- Q002
TAPE END
S901
SENSOR
MODE
1 SWITCH 11
22
S/T REEL SENSOR
4-29 LS-057 / DEW SENSOR / MODE SWITCH / TAPE TOP / TAPE END / TAPE LED
FP-228 FP-299 FP-300 FP-302 FP-301

FP-258 (VIDEO LIGHT, S VIDEO) FLEXIBLE BOARD

FP-258 FLEXIBLE

(SS-1000)
FP-258
(VIDEO LIGHT, S VIDEO)
(VIDEO LIGHT)
20
FP-260
J201
1
Y C
S VIDEO
G G
OUT
A/V
OUT
Schematic diagram and printed wiring board of the VC-256 board are not shown.
CN201
DV IN/OUT
1-680-199- 11
FP-258 FLEXIBLE
VIDEO LIGHT,S VIDEO
LND151
LIGHT VCC
LND152
LIGHT VCC
VIDEO
LIGHT LND154
LIGHT GND
LND155
LIGHT GND
SOL001
LND102 CN1001 20P
SEIDEN VL_UNREG 20
VL_UNREG 19
UNREG_GND 18
UNREG_GND 17
XS_JACK_IN 16
S_C_I/O 15
J201
REG_GND 14
S VIDEO
G
S_Y_I/O 13
OUT
C
AUDIO_R_I/O 12 TO
REG_GND 11 VC-256 BOARD (13/15)
Y
(SEE PAGE 4-55 of LEVEL 3)

G
VIDEO_I/O 10
REG_GND 9
AUDIO_L_I/O 8
V_JACK_IN 7
REG_GND 6
NTPB 5
A/V OUT TPB 4
CN201 4P REG_GND 3
TPA 4 TPA 2
NTPA 3 NTPA 1
DV IN/OUT
TPB 2
NTPB 1
LND201
A
LND101
A
16

DCR-TRV130/TRV130E
4-3. WAVEFORMS
CD-281 BOARD MI-041 BOARD PD-131 BOARD VF-129 BOARD

CAMERA REC REC/PB, IR ON REC/PB
1 IC5501 rk
1 IC191 1,2 1 IC3901 7 1 IC901 1,5
0.5Vp-p
6.8Vp-p 0.2Vp-p H 2.0Vp-p
H 3.5795 MHz
16.7 msec
2 IC5501 rj
2 IC191 3,4 2 IC3901 ws 2 IC901 3
0.5Vp-p
6.8Vp-p 0.9Vp-p H 2.0Vp-p
0.5 µsec/div
H
16.7 msec
3 IC5501 rh
3 IC191 7 3 IC3901 ra 3 IC901 7
0.5Vp-p
H
0.6Vp-p 1.1Vp-p
H 16.7 msec
0.6Vp-p
H
4 IC5501 w;
4 IC191 qs“ 4 IC901 qa
4.6Vp-p 3.0Vp-p
105 nsec 2H 0.9Vp-p
H
5 IC5501 ws
5 IC191 qd,qf¢ 5 IC901 qd
3.0Vp-p
6.8Vp-p 2H 1.1Vp-p
105 nsec
H
6 IC5501 wf
6 Q191 E 6 IC901 qh
3.0Vp-p
2H 2.4Vp-p
0.6Vp-p
H H
7 IC5502 1
2.8Vp-p
H
8 IC5502 wh
6 MHz 3.0Vp-p
WAVEFORMS
4-65 CD-281, MI-041, PD-131, VF-129
Waveforms and parts location of the VC-256 board are not shown.

DCR-TRV130/TRV130E
4-4. MOUNTED PARTS LOCATION

CD-281 BOARD (SIDE A) MI-041 BOARD (SIDE A) MI-041 BOARD (SIDE B) PD-131 BOARD (SIDE A)
C191 B-2 C758 D-2 D752 B-3 C759 E-7 Q3902 A-7 C5501 C-3 Q5501 C-3
C196 B-1 C762 D-1 D753 B-4 C761 B-5 Q3903 A-5 C5502 C-3 Q5502 B-1
C775 B-2 D754 A-1 C763 C-7 Q3904 A-5 C5503 B-4 Q5503 A-2
IC191 A-2 C784 C-2 D755 C-4 C764 C-5 C5504 B-3 Q5504 A-2
C791 B-2 D756 C-4 C768 C-7 R757 C-5 C5505 B-4 Q5505 B-1
C794 C-3 D3901 B-4 C769 B-5 R761 B-5 C5506 B-4 Q5601 A-4
C799 B-4 D3902 A-3 C770 C-5 R764 B-5 C5507 B-4 Q5602 C-6
C800 C-4 D3903 A-4 C772 C-7 R765 B-5 C5508 C-3 Q5603 A-5
CD-281 BOARD (SIDE B) C808 C-4 C773 B-5 R766 C-5 C5509 C-4
C809 C-4 IC751 B-3 C774 C-7 R767 C-5 C5510 B-4 R5501 C-4
C193 A-4 C810 B-3 IC3901 A-2 C776 C-5 R768 B-5 C5511 B-3 R5502 C-4
C194 B-5 C3901 B-2 C777 C-7 R769 C-5 C5512 B-3 R5503 C-4
C195 A-4 C3902 B-2 L3903 A-3 C779 B-5 R770 B-5 C5513 B-4 R5504 B-3
C197 A-4 C3903 B-2 C780 B-5 R771 B-5 C5514 C-4 R5505 B-4
C3904 B-2 R786 B-4 C781 C-5 R772 B-5 C5515 B-3 R5506 B-4
CN191 A-5 C3905 B-1 R797 C-3 C782 C-5 R774 C-5 C5516 A-3 R5507 B-4
C3906 B-1 R3901 A-3 C783 B-5 R775 C-6 C5517 A-4 R5508 B-4
L191 B-4 C3907 B-2 R3903 B-2 C785 B-5 R776 C-6 C5518 A-4 R5509 B-4
C3908 B-1 R3904 B-2 C786 B-5 R779 B-7 C5519 A-4 R5510 B-3
Q191 A-5 C3910 B-2 R3905 B-1 C787 C-6 R780 C-7 C5520 C-3 R5511 B-3
C3911 B-2 R3907 B-1 C788 B-5 R782 B-7 C5521 B-2 R5512 B-4
R191 A-5 C3912 C-3 R3908 A-3 C789 B-8 R783 B-7 C5522 B-1 R5513 B-3
R192 A-4 C3913 B-3 R3909 A-2 C796 C-5 R784 B-7 C5523 A-3 R5514 A-3
R193 A-4 C3914 A-2 R3912 A-3 C3909 B-7 R785 B-7 C5524 A-1 R5515 A-3
R194 B-4 C3915 A-1 R3913 A-1 C3931 A-7 R788 B-5 C5525 B-4 R5516 C-2
R195 B-5 C3916 A-1 R3914 A-1 C3933 B-6 R789 B-5 C5526 B-4 R5517 B-2
R198 A-4 C3917 A-2 R3915 A-2 R3902 B-7 C5527 B-4 R5518 B-2
C3918 A-2 R3916 A-2 CN751 C-5 R3919 A-7 C5528 C-2 R5519 B-2
C3919 A-1 R3917 A-2 CN752 C-6 R3920 A-7 C5529 B-3 R5520 A-3
C3920 A-1 R3926 A-3 CN753 B-6 R3921 A-7 C5530 A-2 R5521 B-2
C3921 A-3 R3927 B-3 R3922 A-5 C5531 A-2 R5522 B-2
C3922 A-1 R3931 B-2 IC752 B-5 R3923 A-6 C5532 B-1 R5523 C-4
C3923 A-3 R3945 A-1 IC753 B-7 R3924 B-6 C5601 A-4 R5524 C-4
C3924 A-1 R3946 A-3 R3925 A-6 C5602 C-5 R5525 C-2
C3925 A-1 L751 B-6 R3928 B-6 C5603 C-6 R5526 C-3
C3926 A-2 SE751 C-2 L3902 B-7 R3929 A-6 C5604 A-5 R5527 A-1
C3929 A-2 SE752 E-2 L3904 A-6 R3930 B-7 C5605 A-5 R5528 A-2
C3930 A-2 L3905 A-6 C5606 A-6 R5529 A-2
C3932 C-3 L3906 B-6 RB751 C-7 C5607 C-5 R5530 A-2
C3934 A-3 RB752 E-7 C5608 C-6 R5531 C-4
C3935 A-2 Q3901 A-7 RB3901 B-8 R5532 B-1
CN5501 A-2 R5533 B-2
CN5502 B-2 R5534 B-3
CN5601 A-6 R5535 B-3
CN5701 B-6 R5539 D-6
CN5702 D-6 R5601 C-5
R5602 A-5
D5501 C-3 R5603 B-5
D5502 A-4 R5604 C-5
D5503 A-2 R5605 A-6
D5601 A-5 R5606 A-5
D5603 D-2 R5607 A-5
D5604 D-2 R5608 D-2
R5609 D-2
ET5601 A-5 R5610 A-5
ET5602 C-6 R5611 A-5
R5702 D-6
FB5501 C-3 R5703 C-6
FB5502 C-4
RB5501 A-3
IC5501 B-4 RB5502 A-2
IC5502 B-3 RB5503 A-2
IC5601 A-4 RB5601 A-4
IC5602 A-5
T5601 B-6
L5501 C-3
L5502 C-4
L5503 B-3
L5601 C-5
PD-131 BOARD (SIDE B)

D5602 A-8
PARTS LOCATION
4-69 CD-281, MI-041, PD-131
DCR-TRV130/TRV130E
VF-129 BOARD (SIDE A)

C903 A-2 R913 C-2
C904 B-2 R914 C-1
C906 A-2 R915 A-1
C907 A-1 R916 A-1
C909 B-1 R917 A-1
C913 A-2 R922 D-1
R927 B-1
CN902 B-1 R928 B-1
R929 A-1
D901 A-1 R930 C-1
R931 C-1
IC901 A-1 R932 C-1
L901 B-1 RV903 C-2

L903 D-1 RV904 D-1
R903 A-1 T901 D-1

R907 B-1 T902 D-1
R908 B-2
R909 B-2 TH901 C-2
R910 B-2
R912 A-2 W901 D-2
VF-129 BOARD (SIDE B)

C901 A-3 R901 A-3
C902 A-2 R902 A-2
C905 A-3 R904 A-3
C908 B-2 R905 A-2
C910 C-3 R906 A-2
C911 C-3 R911 A-3
C912 B-3 R918 C-2
C914 D-3 R919 C-2
C915 D-3 R920 C-2
C916 C-3 R921 D-2
R923 D-3
CN901 B-3 R924 C-3
R925 C-3
D903 D-3 R926 D-2
L902 B-2
Q901 A-2
Q902 B-2
Q903 C-3
Q904 C-2
PARTS LOCATION
VF-129 4-70E
DCR-TRV130/TRV130E
SECTION 5
ADJUSTMENTS
5-1
1. Before starting adjustment
1-1. Adjusting items when replacing main parts and boards.
When replacing main parts, adjust the items indicated by z in the following table.
Replaced parts
Block replacement Parts replacement
IC1501, X1501 (Timing generator)
SE751,752 (PITCH,YAW sensor)

IC3101 (EQ, A/D conv. PLL)
IC5502 (Timing generator (LCD))

IC5501 (RGB driver (LCD))
IC3901 (IR transmitter) *2
IC3301 (DV signal process)
IC901 (CRT drive (EVF))

ND901 (Fluorescent tube)
Mechanism deck M901 (Drum assy.) *1

Mechanism deck M902 (Capstan motor)
IC3103 (REC/PB AMP)

LS chassis assy.
IC191 (CCD imager)
(Picture tube)
LCD901 (LCD panel)
IC1502 (S/H, AGC)
IC5401 (Audio out)

IC3701 (Video out)
IC1601 (EVR)
Adjustment
Adjustment
Section
V901
Mechanism deck *1
EL-Back light *3
Mechanism deck
CD-281 board
VC-256 board
VC-256 board
VC-256 board
VC-256 board
VC-256 board
VC-256 board
VC-256 board
VC-256 board
Video light *2
PD-131 board
PD-131 board
VF-129 board
MI-041 board
MI-041 board
Lens device
LCD block
LCD block
Initialization of Initialization of C, D, 8 page data EVF block

C, D, E, F, 7, 8
page data Initialization of E, F, 7 page data
HALL adj. z
Flange back adj. z z
Color reproduction adj. z z
Camera
AWB & LV standard data input z z
Auto white balance adj. z z
Angular velocity sensor sens. adj. z
Centering adj. z z
Focus adj. z z
Aberration adj. z z
EVF
Horizontal amplitude adj. z z
Vertical amplitude adj. z z
Brightness adj. z z
Initial data input
VCO adj. z
RGB AMP adj. z
LCD Contrast adj. z z
COM-AMP adj. z
V-COM adj. z z
White balance adj. z z z
System control Serial No. input
REEL FG adj. z z
CAP FG duty adj. z z z
Switching position adj. z z
Servo
AGC center level adj. z z
APC & AEQ adj. z z
PLL fo & LPF fo adj. z z
27MHz origin oscillation adj. z z
Chroma BPF fo adj. z
Video
S VIDEO OUT Y level adj. z z
S VIDEO OUT chroma level adj. z z
IR video carrier frequency adj. z z
IR *4 IR video deviation adj. z z z z
IR audio deviation adj. z z z
Mechanism Tape path adj. z z zz
Table. 5-1-1(1).
5-2
When replacing a board or EEPROM, adjust the items indicated by z in the following table.
*1: When replacing the drum assy. or mechanism deck, reset
EEPROM
Board the data of page: 2, address: A2 to A4 to “00”. (Refer to
replacement “Record of Use check” of “5-4. SERVICE MODE”)
*2: When replacing the video light, reset the data of page:
2, address: E0 to E2 to “00”. (Refer to “Record of Use
check” of “5-4. SERVICE MODE”)
*3: When replacing the EL-Back light, reset the data of
page: 2, address: E3 to E5 to “00”. (Refer to “Record of
(COMPLETE)
(COMPLETE)
(COMPLETE)
(COMPLETE)
Use check” of “5-4. SERVICE MODE”)
Adjustment *4: NTSC model only
Adjustment
Section
IC4502
IC4901
VC-256 board
VC-256 board
VC-256 board
PD-131 board
VF-129 board
MI-041 board
Initialization of Initialization of C, D, 8 page data z z
C, D, E, F, 7, 8
page data Initialization of E, F, 7 page data z z
HALL adj. z z
Camera
Angular velocity sensor sens. adj. zz z
Centering adj. z
Focus adj. z
Aberration adj. z
EVF
Horizontal amplitude adj. z
Vertical amplitude adj. z
Brightness adj. z
Initial data input z z z
VCO adj. z z z
RGB AMP adj. z z z
LCD Contrast adj. z z z
COM-AMP adj. z z z
V-COM adj. z z z
White balance adj. z z z
System control Serial No. input z z
REEL FG adj. z z
CAP FG duty adj. z z
Switching position adj. z z
Servo
AGC center level adj. z z
APC & AEQ adj. z z
PLL fo & LPF fo adj. z z
27MHz origin oscillation adj. z
Chroma BPF fo adj. z
Video
S VIDEO OUT Y level adj. z
S VIDEO OUT chroma level adj. z
IR video carrier frequency adj. zz z
IR *4 IR video deviation adj. zz z
IR audio deviation adj. zz z
Mechanism Tape path adj.
Table. 5-1-1(2).
5-3
5-1. CAMERA SECTION ADJUSTMENT
1-1. PREPARATIONS BEFORE ADJUSTMENT (CAMERA SECTION)
1-1-1. List of Service Tools

• Oscilloscope • Color monitor • Vectorscope
• Regulated power supply • Digital voltmeter
Ref. No. Name Parts Code Usage
Auto white balance adjustment/check
J-1 Filter for color temperature correction (C14) J-6080-058-A
White balance adjustment/check
ND filter 1.0 J-6080-808-A White balance check
J-2 ND filter 0.4 J-6080-806-A White balance check
ND filter 0.1 J-6080-807-A White balance check
J-3 Pattern box PTB-450 J-6082-200-A
J-4 Color chart for pattern box J-6020-250-A
Adjustment remote commander (RM-95 upgraded)
J-5 J-6082-053-B
(Note)
J-6 Siemens star chart J-6080-875-A For checking the flange back
J-7 Clear chart for pattern box J-6080-621-A
J-8 Multi CPC jig J-6082-311-A For adjusting the LCD block
J-9 CPC jig for BX/BK J-6082-521-A For connecting the adjustment remote commander
J-10 IR receiver jig J-6082-383-A For adjusting the IR transmitter
J-11 Minipattern box J-6082-353-B For adjusting the flange back
J-12 Camera base J-6082-384-A For adjusting the flange back
Note: If the micro processor IC in the adjustment remote commander is

not the new micro processor (UPD7503G-C56-12), the pages cannot
be switched. In this case, replace with the new micro processor (8-
759-148-35).
J-1 J-2 J-3 J-4 J-5
J-6 J-7 J-8 J-9 J-10
J-11 J-12
Fig. 5-1-1.
5-4
1-1-2. Preparations
Note1: For details of how remove the cabinet and boards, refer to “2.
DISASSEMBLY”.
Note2: When performing only the adjustments, the lens block and boards Pattern box
need not be disassembled.
1) Connect the equipment for adjustments according to Fig. 5-1-4.

2) Connect the adjustment remote commander to CN1011 of VC-
256 board via CPC jig for BX/BK (J-6082-521-A). To operate
the adjustment remote commander, connect the AC power
1.5 m
adapter to the DC IN jack of CPC jig for BX/BK, or connect
the L series Info-LITHIUM battery to the battery terminal of
CPC jig for BX/BK. (Fig. 5-1-3.)
3) The front panel block (MI-041 board, microphone unit, video
light) need not be assembled except during the steady shot
operation check.
Note3: As removing the cabinet (R) (removing the VC-256 board CN1007)
means removing the lithium 3V power supply (CF-1000 block Front of the lens
BT101), data such as date, time, user-set menus will be lost. After
completing adjustments, reset these data. If the cabinet (R) has
been removed, the self-diagnosis data, data on history of use (total
drum rotation time etc.) will be lost. Before removing, note down
the self-diagnosis data (data of page: 2, address: B0 to C6) and Fig. 5-1-2.
data on history use (data of page: 2, address: A2 to AA and E0 to
E5). (Refer to “5-4. Service Mode” for the self-diagnosis data and
data on the history use.)
Note4: Setting the “Forced Camera Power ON” Mode

2) Select page: D, address: 10, set data: 01, and press the PAUSE CN1011
button. 1 2
The above procedure will enable the camera power to be turned
on with the SS-1000 block removed. After completing adjustments,
be sure to exit the “Forced Camera Power ON Mode”. 19 20
Note5: Exiting the “Forced Camera Power ON” Mode

2) Select page: D, address: 10, set data: 00, and press the PAUSE
button.
Remove the
CPC lid
Fig. 5-1-3.
5-5
Note: Use either the AC power adaptor or the Info-LITHIUM battery as the power supply of the CPC jig for BX/BK.
CPC jig for BX/BK (J-6082-521-A)
AC power adaptor
(8.4Vdc)
AC-L10 or
AC-VQ800
LANC
Terminated at 75 Ω jack
L series
Info LITHIUM
Vector scope battery Must be connected
Adjustment (7.2Vdc)
remote commander
Color monitor
EVF block
VIDEO AUDIO
(Yellew) (Black)
Must be connected when
performing the EVF system
adiustments.
CN1551
CN1008 TO SS-1000
Lens block
Front block
panel
CN1501 Must be
block
CN701 connected DC IN
CN1011
CN1006 jack
A/V OUT
jack CN1003
CN1002 CN1009
VC-256 board AC power adaptor
CN1007
CN4401 (8.4Vdc)
CN4402 CN4403 CN3101 CN4404 AC-L10 or
MI-041 board AC-VQ800
CN754
Must be connected when Must be connected.

performing the steady shot
check.
Cabinet (R) To CF-1000 block CN001
Must be connected when

performing the LCD system
adjustments.
To PD-131 board
CN5701 CN5601 CN5501
PD-131 CN5502
board
CN5701
Multi CPC jig
CN5702
(J-6082-311-A)
Must be connected when performing

the LCD system adjustment.
Fig. 5-1-4.
5-6
1-1-3. Precaution
1. Setting the Switch
Unless otherwise specified, set the switches as follows and perform
adjustments without loading cassette.
1. POWER switch (SS-1000 block) ........................... CAMERA 8. DISPLAY (CF-1000 block) .............................................. ON
2. NIGHT SHOT switch (Lens block) ................................. OFF 9. FOCUS switch (CF-1000 block) .......................... MANUAL
3. LIGHT switch (FK-1000 block) ...................................... OFF 10. BACK LIGHT (CF-1000 block) ...................................... OFF
4. DEMO MODE (Menu display) ....................................... OFF 11. PROGRAM AE (Menu display) ...................................... OFF
5. DIGITAL ZOOM (Menu display) ................................... OFF 12. PICTURE EFFECT (Menu display) ................................ OFF
6. STEADY SHOT (Menu display) ..................................... OFF 13. 16 : 9 WIDE (MENU display) ......................................... OFF
7. DISPLAY (Menu display) ................................. V-OUT/LCD
2. Order of Adjustments
Basically carry out adjustments in the order given.
Color bar chart (Color reproduction adjustment frame)

Electronic beam scanning frame
H
Yellow
Magenta
White
Cyan
Green
C C=D D
Red
Blue
Magenta
Yellow
Green
White
Cyan
Blue
Red
CRT picture frame
V
A B A=B B A
Fig. b (monitor TV picture)
Fig. a Enlargement
(VIDEO terminal
output waveform)
Difference in level
Adjust the camera zoom and direction to

obtain the output waveform shown in Fig. a
B A and the monitor TV display shown in Fig. b.
Fig.5-1-5.
3. Subjects
1) Color bar chart (Color reproduction adjustment frame)
When performing adjustments using the color bar chart, adjust
the picture frame as shown in Fig. 5-1-5. (Color reproduction
White
adjustment frame)
2) Clear chart (Color reproduction adjustment frame) 841mm
Remove the color bar chart from the pattern box and insert a Black
clear chart in its place. (Do not perform zoom operations during
this time.)
3) Flange back adjustment chart
Make the chart shown in Fig. 5-1-6 using A0 size (1189mm × 1189mm
841mm) black and white vellum paper.
Fig. 5-1-6.
Note: Use matte vellum paper bigger than A0, and make sure the edges of
the black and white paper joined together are not rough.
5-7
1-2. INITIALIZATION OF C, D, E, F, 7, 8 PAGE Processing after Completing Modification of C, D, 8 Page data
DATA Order Page Address Data Procedure
1 2 00 29 Set the data
1-2-1. INITIALIZATION OF C, D, 8 PAGE DATA
2 2 01 29 Set the data, and press the PAUSE
button.
1. Initializing the C, D, 8 Page Data
Note: If the following symptoms occur after completing of the
Note1: If “Initializing the C, D, 8 Page Data” is performed, all data of the
“Modification of C, D, 8 page data”, check that the data of the “Fixed
C page, D page and 8 page will be initialized. (It is impossible to
data-2” addresses of D page are same as those of the same model of
initialize a single page.)
the same destination.
Note2: If the C, D, 8 page data has been initialized, the following
1) The battery end mark on the LCD screen is flashing.
adjustments need to be performed again.
2) The power is shut off so that unit cannot operate.
1) Modification of C, D, 8 page data
2) Serial No. input
3) LCD system adjustments 3. C Page Table
4) Servo and RF system adjustments
5) Video system adjustments Note: Fixed data-1: Initialized data. (Refer to “1. Initializing the C, D, 8
Page Data”.)
Fixed data-2: Modified data. (Refer to “2. Modification of C, D, 8
Adjusting page C Page Data”.)
Adjusting Address 10 to FF
Address Remark
Adjusting page D Initial value
Adjusting Address 10 to FF 00 to 0F
Adjusting page 8 10 EE Switching position adj.
Adjusting Address 00 to FF 11 00
12 00
Initializing Method: 13 00
Order Page Address Data Procedure 14 to 16 Fixed data-1
1 0 01 01 Set the data 17 E0 REEL FG adj.
2 3 81 10 Set the data 18 25 AEQ adj.
3 3 80 0A Set the data, and press the PAUSE 19 25
button. 1A Fixed data-1
4 3 80 Check that the data changes to 1B 25 AEQ adj.
“1A” 1C 25
5 Perform “Modification of C, D, 1D Fixed data-1
8 Page Data”. 1E 25 AGC center level adj.
1F 3E PLL fo adj.
2. Modification of C, D, 8 Page Data
If the C, D, 8 page data has been initialized, change the data of the 20 3E
“Fixed data-2” address shown in the following tables by manual 21 CA APC adj.
input. 22 99 LPF fo adj.
23 to 24 Fixed data-1
Modifying Method: 25 88 S VIDEO out Y level adj.
1) Before changing the data, select page: 0, address: 01, and set
26 E3 S VIDEO out Cr level adj.
data: 01.
2) New data for changing are not shown in the tables because 27 A1 S VIDEO out Cb level adj.
they are different in destination. When changing the data, copy 28 04 Chroma BPF fo adj.
the data built in the same model. 29 20 PLL fo fine adj.
Note: If copy the data built in the different model, the camcorder may 2A to 2B Fixed data-1
not operate.
3) When changing the data, press the PAUSE button of the 2C 03 APC adj.
adjustment remote commander each time when setting new 2D to 2F Fixed data-1
data to write the data in the non-volatile memory. 30 E0 REEL FG adj.
4) Check that the data of adjustment addresses is the initial value. 31 to 46 Fixed data-1
If not, change the data to the initial value. 47 Fixed data-2
86 Fixed data-2
89 Fixed data-2
8A to 91 Fixed data-1
92 Fixed data-2
9A Fixed data-2
9B
5-8
C page
4. D Page Table
Address Remark
Initial value
Note: Fixed data-1: Initialized data. (Refer to “1. Initializing the C, D, 8
9C to D5 Fixed data-1 Page Data”.)
D6 Fixed data-2 Fixed data-2: Modified data. (Refer to “2. Modification of C, D, 8
D7 (Modified data. Copy the data built in Page Data”.)
D8 the same model.) Address Remark
D9 Initial value
DA 00 to 0F
DB 10 00 Test mode
DC 11 to 12 Fixed data-1
DD 13 Fixed data-2
DE 14 (Modified data. Copy the data built in
DF 15 the same model.)
E0 16 to 1C Fixed data-1
E1 to E5 Fixed data-1 1D Fixed data-2
E6 Fixed data-2 1E Fixed data-1
E7 Fixed data-1 1F Fixed data-2
E8 08 Serial No. input 20 Fixed data-1
E9 00 21 Fixed data-2
EA 46 22 (Modified data. Copy the data built in
EB 01 23 the same model.)
EC 02 24 Fixed data-1
ED 00 25 Fixed data-2
EE 00 26 Fixed data-1
EF 00 27 Fixed data-2
F0 to F3 Fixed data-1 28 to 2A Fixed data-1
F4 00 Emergency memory address 2B Fixed data-2
F5 00 2C (Modified data. Copy the data built in
F6 00 2D the same model.)
F7 00 2E Fixed data-1
F8 00 2F Fixed data-2
F9 00 30 (Modified data. Copy the data built in
FA 00 31 the same model.)
FB 00 32 to 3F Fixed data-1
FC 00 40 Fixed data-2
FD 00 41 (Modified data. Copy the data built in
FE 00 42 the same model.)
FF 00 43
44
Table. 5-1-2.
45
46 Fixed data-1
47 Fixed data-2
48
49 Fixed data-1
4A Fixed data-2
4B (Modified data. Copy the data built in
4C the same model.)
4D Fixed data-1
4E Fixed data-2
4F (Modified data. Copy the data built in
50 the same model.)
51
52
53
54
55
56
57 Fixed data-1
5-9
D page
5. 8 Page Table
Address Remark
Initial value
Note: Fixed data-1: Initialized data. (Refer to “1. Initializing the C, D, 8
58 Fixed data-2 Page Data”.)
59 (Modified data. Copy the data built in Fixed data-2: Modified data. (Refer to “2. Modification of C, D, 8
5A the same model.) Page Data”.)
5B Address Remark
5C
5D to 60 Fixed data-1 00 to 3F Fixed data-1
61 Fixed data-2 40 Fixed data-2
62 Fixed data-1 41 to 8F Fixed data-1
64 (Modified data. Copy the data built in 91 to FF Fixed data-1
65 the same model.) Table. 5-1-4.
66
67
68
87 Fixed data-2
88 (Modified data. Copy the data built in
89 the same model.)
8A
8B
8C
8D
8E to 9F Fixed data-1
A0 Fixed data-2
A1
A2 80 VCO adj. (LCD)
A3 70
A4 80 V-COM adj. (LCD)
A5 20 RGB AMP adj.(LCD)
A6 Fixed data-1
A7 80 COM AMP adj. ( LCD)
A8 80 White balance adj. (LCD)
A9 80
AA 30 Contrast adj. (LCD)
AB Fixed data-1
AC Fixed data-2
AD
AE to AF Fixed data-1
B0 Fixed data-2
B1
B2 to B7 Fixed data-1
B8 Fixed data-2
B9 to BB Fixed data-1
BC Fixed data-2
BD to FF Fixed data-1
Table. 5-1-3.
5-10
1-2-2. INITIALIZATION OF E, F, 7 PAGE DATA Processing after Completing Modification of E, F, 7 Page data
Order Page Address Data Procedure
1. Initializing the E, F, 7 Page Data
1 2 00 29 Set the data
Note1: If “Initializing the E, F, 7 Page Data” is performed, all data of the 2 2 01 29 Set the data, and press the PAUSE
E page, F page and 7 page will be initialized. (It is impossible to button.
initialize a single page.)
Note2: If the E, F, 7 page data has been initialized, following adjustments
need to be performed again. 3. F Page Table
1) Modification of E, F, 7 page data
2) Camera system adjustments
Note: Fixed data-1: Initialized data. (Refer to “1. Initializing the E, F, 7
3) Servo and RF system adjustments
Page Data”.)
4) Video system adjustments
Fixed data-2: Modified data. (Refer to “2. Modification of E, F, 7
5) IR transmitter adjustments
Page Data”.)
Adjusting page F
Address Initial value Remark
Adjusting Address 10 to FF
NTSC PAL
Adjusting page E 00 to 0F
Adjusting Address 00 to FF 10 to 27 Fixed data-1
Adjusting page 7 28 Fixed data-2
Adjusting Address 00 to FF 29 to 37 Fixed data-1
38 68 68 HALL adj.
Note: NTSC model: DCR-TRV130
PAL model: DCR-TRV130E
39 80 80
3A 8D 8D
Initializing Method: 3B Fixed data-2
Order Page Address Data Procedure 3C 80 80 Auto white balance & LV standard
1 0 01 01 Set the data. 3D 7A 7A data Input
2 6 00 Set the following data. 3E 2B 2B
55: NTSC model 3F 80 80
51: PAL model 40 65 65
3 6 01 Set the following data, and press 41 80 80
PAUSE button. 42 8D 8D Auto white balance adj.
55: NTSC model 43 87 87
51: PAL model
4 6 02 Check that the data changes to
47 33 33 Color reproduction adj.
“01”.
48 Fixed data-1
5 Perform “Modification of E, F, 7
49 34 34 Color reproduction adj.
Page Data”.
4A to 4C Fixed data-1
2. Modification of E, F, 7 Page Data 4D 8C 8C 27MHz origin osc. adj.
If the E, F, 7 page data has been initialized, change the data of the 4E 28 28 Flange back Adj.
“Fixed data-2” address shown in the following table by manual input. 4F 07 07
50 3A 3A
Modifying Method:
1) Before changing the data, select page: 0, address: 01, and set 51 4A 4A
data: 01. 52 12 12
2) New data for changing are not shown in the tables because 53 0B 0B
they are different in destination. When changing the data, copy 54 54 54
the data built in the same model. 55 00 00
Note: If copy the data built in the different model, the camcorder may
not operate.
56 19 19
3) When changing the data, press the PAUSE button of the 57 00 00
adjustment remote commander each time when setting new 58 37 37
data to write the data in the non-volatile memory. 59 00 00
4) Check that the data of adjustment addresses is the initial value. 5A 00 00
If not, change the data to the initial value.
5B 04 04
5C 00 00
5D 00 00
5E 51 75 Angular velocity sensor sensitivity adj.
5F 4A 5A
60 Fixed data-1
61 00 00 Flange back Adj.
5-11
F page
4. E Page Table
Address Initial value Remark
NTSC PAL Page Data”.)
64 83 83 CAP FG duty adj. Fixed data-2: Modified data. (Refer to “2. Modification of E, F, 7
65 to 7D Fixed data-1 Page Data”.)
7E 41 41 IR video deviation adj. Address Remark
7F 33 33 IR audio deviation adj.
80 C7 C7 IR video carrier freq. adj. 00 to 03 Fixed data-1
81 to 99 Fixed data-1 04 Fixed data-2
9A Fixed data-2 05 to 31 Fixed data-1
9B to CC Fixed data-1 32 Fixed data-2
CD Fixed data-2 33 Fixed data-1
CE to D3 Fixed data-1 34 Fixed data-2
D4 Fixed data-2 35 Fixed data-1
D5 to D6 Fixed data-1 36 Fixed data-2
D7 FD FC Color reproduction adj. 37 Fixed data-1
D8 F4 F2 38 Fixed data-2
D9 0F 33 39
DA 31 11 3A Fixed data-1
DB to DE Fixed data-1 3B Fixed data-2
DF Fixed data-2 3C to 50 Fixed data-1
E0 to E9 Fixed data-1 51 Fixed data-2
FA Fixed data-2 52 to 54 Fixed data-1
FB to FF Fixed data-1 55 Fixed data-2
56 Fixed data-1
Table. 5-1-5.
57 Fixed data-2
58 to 7D Fixed data-1
7E Fixed data-2
7F to FF Fixed data-1
Table. 5-1-6.
5. 7 Page Table

Page Data”.)
Fixed data-2: Modified data. (Refer to “2. Modification of E, F, 7
Page Data”.)
Address Remark
00 to FF Fixed data-1
Table. 5-1-7.
5-12
1-3. CAMERA SYSTEM ADJUSTMENTS
Before perform the camera system adjustments, check that the
specified values of “VIDEO SYSTEM ADJUSTMENTS” are
satisfied.
1. HALL Adjustment
For detecting the position of the lens iris, adjust AMP gain and
offset.
Subject Not required
Measurement Point Display data of page 1 (Note1)
Measuring Instrument Adjustment remote commander
Adjustment Page F
Adjustment Address 38, 39, 3A
Specified Value 1 88 to 8C
Specified Value 2 15 to 19
Note1: Displayed data of page 1 of the adjustment remote commander.

1 : 00 : XX
IRIS display data
Adjusting method:
1 0 01 01 Set the data.
2 6 94 8A Set the data.
4 6 01 6D Set the data, and press PAUSE
button.
“01”. (Note2)
6 6 01 00 Set the data, and press PAUSE
button.
Note2: The adjustment data will be automatically input to page: F, address:

38, 39, 3A.
Checking method:
button.
3 1 Check that the IRIS display data
(Note1) satisfies the specified
value 1.
button.
5 1 Check that the IRIS display data
(Note1) satisfies the specified
value.2.
Processing after Completing Adjustments:

button.
5-13
2. Flange Back Adjustment
(Using Minipattern Box)
The inner focus lens flange back adjustment is carried out
automatically. In whichever case, the focus will be deviated during
auto focusing/manual focusing.
Subject Siemens star chart with ND filter for
the minipattern box (Note1)
Adjustment Page F
Adjustment Address 4E to 5D, 61
Note1: Dark Siemens star chart.

Note2: Check that the data of page: 6, address: 02 is “00”. If not, to page:
6, address: 01, set data: 00, and press the PAUSE button.
Switch setting:
1) NIGHT SHOT .................................................................. OFF
Preparations: Adjusting method:

1) The minipattern box is installed as shown in the following Order Page Address Data Procedure
figure.
Note: The attachment lenses are not used.
2) Install the minipattern box so that the distance between it and 2 6 01 13 Set the data, and press PAUSE
the front of the lens of the camcorder is less than 3cm. button.
3) Make the height of the minipattern box and the camcorder equal. 3 6 01 27 Set the data, and press PAUSE
4) Check that the output voltage of the regulated power supply is button.
the specified voltage. 4 6 02 Check that the data changes to
5) Check that at both the zoom lens TELE end and WIDE end, “01”. (Note3)
the center of the Siemens star chart and center of the exposure
screen coincide. Note3: The adjustment data will be automatically input to page: F, address:
4E to 5D, 61.
Specified voltage: The specified voltage varies according to the
minipattern box, so adjust the power supply Processing after Completing Adjustments:
output voltage to the specified voltage written Order Page Address Data Procedure
on the sheet which is supplied with the
minipattern box. 1 0 01 00 Set the data.
2 Turn off the power and turn on
again.
Below 3 cm 3 Perform “Flange Back Check”.
Minipattern box
Camcorder
Camera
table
Regulated power supply

Output voltage : Specified voltage ±0.01Vdc
Output current : more than 3.5A
Red (+)
Black (–)
Yellow (SENS +)
White (SENS –) Need not connected

Black (GND)
Fig. 5-1-7.
5-14
3. Flange Back Adjustment
(Using Flange Back Adjustment Chart and Subject
More Than 500m Away)
The inner focus lens flange back adjustment is carried out
automatically. In whichever case, the focus will be deviated during
auto focusing/manual focusing.
3-1. Flange Back Adjustment (1) 3-2. Flange Back Adjustment (2)
Perform this adjustment after performing “Flange Back Adjustment
Subject Flange back adjustment chart
(1)”.
(2.0 m from the front of the protection
glass)(Luminance: 350 ± 50 lux) Subject Subject more than 500m away
(Subjects with clear contrast such as
buildings, etc.)
Adjustment Page F
Measurement Point Check operation on TV monitor
Adjustment Address 4E to 5D, 61
Measuring Instrument
Note1: Check that the data of page: 6, address: 02 is “00”. If not, to page: Adjustment Page F
6, address: 01, set data: 00, and press the PAUSE button. Adjustment Address 4E to 5D, 61
Switch setting: Note1: Check that the data of page: 6, address: 02 is “00”. If not, to page:
1) NIGHT SHOT .................................................................. OFF 6, address: 01, set data: 00, and press the PAUSE button.
Adjusting method: Switch setting:

Order Page Address Data Procedure 1) NIGHT SHOT .................................................................. OFF
Preparations:
2 6 01 13 Set the data, and press PAUSE 1) Set the zoom lens to the TELE end and expose a subject that is
button. more than 500m away (subject with clear contrast such as
3 6 01 15 Set the data, and press PAUSE building, etc.). (Nearby subjects less than 500m away should
button. not be in the screen.)
“01”. (Note2) Adjusting method:
4E to 5D, 61.
Processing after Completing Adjustments: button.
Order Page Address Data Procedure 3 Place a ND filter on the lens so
that the optimum image is obtain.
again. 4 6 01 29 Set the data, and press PAUSE
button.
2 Perform “Flange Back
Adjustment (2)” 5 6 02 Check that the data changes to
“01”.(Note2)

4E to 5D, 61.

again.
3 Perform “Flange Back Check”.
5-15
4. Flange Back Check 5. Picture Frame Setting
Subject Siemens star Subject Color bar chart
(2.0m from the front of the lens) (Color reproduction adjustment frame)
(Luminance : approx. 200 lux) (1.5m from the front of the lens)
Measurement Point Check operation on TV monitor Measurement Point Video output terminal
Measuring Instrument Measuring Instrument Oscilloscope and TV monitor
Specified Value Focused at the TELE end and WIDE end. Specified Value A=B, C=D, E=F
Switch setting: Switch setting:

1) NIGHT SHOT .................................................................. OFF 1) NIGHT SHOT .................................................................. OFF
2) DIGITAL ZOOM (Menu display) ................................... OFF
Note: When the auto focus is ON, the lens can be checked if it is focused 3) STEADY SHOT (Menu display) ..................................... OFF
or not by observing the data on the page 1 of the adjustment remote 4) LIGHT (FK-1000 block) .................................................. OFF
commander.
1) Select page: 0, address: 03, and set data: 0F.
Setting method:
2) Page 1 shows the state of the focus.
1 : 00 : XX 1) Adjust the zoom and the camera direction, and set to the
Odd: Focused specified position.
Even: Unfocused 2) Mark the position of the picture frame on the monitor display,
and adjust the picture frame to this position in following
Checking method: adjustments using “Color reproduction adjustment frame”.
1) Select page: 6, address: 40, and set data: 02. Check on the oscilloscope
3) Place the Siemens star 2.0m from the front of the lens. 1. Horizontal period
4) To open the IRIS, decrease the luminous intensity to the A=B C=D
Siemens star up to a point before noise appear on the image.
5) Shoot the Siemens star with the zoom TELE end. B C
6) Turn on the auto focus.
A D
7) Check that the lens is focused (Note).
9) Shoot the Siemens star with the zoom WIDE end.
10) Observe the TV monitor and check that the lens is focused.

Fig. 5-1-8.
2. Vertical period
E E=F F
V
Fig. 5-1-9.
Check on the monitor TV (Underscanned mode)
Color bar chart picture frame Monitor TV picture frame

Fig. 5-1-10.
5-16
6. Color Reproduction Adjustment
Adjust the color Separation matrix coefficient so that proper color
reproduction is produced.
Subject Color bar chart
(Color reproduction adjustment frame)
Measurement Point Video output terminal
Measuring Instrument Vectorscope
Adjustment Page F For NTSC model
Adjustment Address 47, 49, D7, D8

Specified Value All color luminance points should settle
within each color reproduction frame.
Note: NTSC model: DCR-TRV130

Switch setting:
1) NIGHT SHOT .................................................................. OFF
3) STEADY SHOT (Menu display) ..................................... OFF
4) LIGHT (FK-1000 block) .................................................. OFF
Adjusting method:
1) Select page: 0, address: 01, and set data: 01. Burst position
2) Select page: F, address: 8B, and write down the data.
3) Select page: F, address: 8B, set data: 29, and press the PAUSE
button.
4) Select page: F, address: 2B, set the following data, and press For PAL model
the PAUSE button.
17: NTSC model
97: PAL model
5) Select page: 6, address: 01, set data: 3D, and press the PAUSE
button.
6) Adjust the GAIN and PHASE of the vectorscope, and adjust
the burst luminance point to the burst position of the color
reproduction frame.
7) Change the data of page: F, address: 47, 49, D7 and D8, settle
each color luminance point in each color reproduction frame.
Note: Be sure to press the PAUSE button of the adjustment remote
commander before changing the addresses. If not, the new data
will not be written to the memory.

1) Select page: F, address: 8B, set the data written down at step Burst position
2), and press the PAUSE button.
2) Select page: 6, address: 01, set data: 00, and press the PAUSE
Fig. 5-1-11.
button.
5-17
7. Auto White Balance & LV Standard Data Input
Adjust the white balance reference at 3200K, and adjust the normal
coefficient of the light value.
Subject Clear chart
Adjustment Page F
Adjustment Address 3C to 41
Note1: This adjustment should be carried out upon completion of “Color

reproduction adjustments”.
Note2: After the power is turned on, this adjustment can be done only
once.
Note3: Check that the data of page: 6, address: 02 is “00”. If not, to page:
6, address: 01, set data: 00, and press the PAUSE button.
Switch setting:
1) NIGHT SHOT .................................................................. OFF
Adjusting method:
3 Wait for 2 sec.
button.
5 6 01 0D Set the data, and press PAUSE
button.
“01”. (Note4)

3C to 41.
Processing after Completing Adjustments

button.
button.
4 Perform “Auto White Balance
Adjustment”.
5-18
8. Auto White Balance Adjustment Adjusting method:
Adjust to the proper auto white balance output data. Order Page Address Data Procedure
If it is not correct, auto white balance and color reproducibility will
1 Place the C14 filter for color
be poor.
temperature correction on the lens.
Subject Clear chart
3 F B8 Write down the data.
Filter Filter C14 for color temperature
correction 4 F B8 Set the following data, and press
PAUSE button.
2C (NTSC), 2D (PAL)
5 F B9 Write down the data.
Adjustment Page F
6 F B9 80 Set the data, and press PAUSE
Adjustment Address 42, 43 button.
Specified Value NTSC model 7 F BA Write down the data.
R ratio: 2C40 to 2CC0
8 F BA Set the following data, and press
B ratio: 5E20 to 5EE0
PAUSE button.
PAL model
5E (NTSC), 5B (PAL)
R ratio: 2D40 to 2DC0
B ratio: 5B20 to 5BE0 9 F BB Write down the data.
10 F BB 80 Set the data, and press PAUSE
Note1: After the power is turned on, this adjustment can be done only button.
once.
11 6 01 A7 Set the data, and press PAUSE
Note2: Perform “Auto White Balance & LV Standard Data Input” before
this adjustment. button.
Note3: Displayed data of page 1 of the adjustment remote commander. 12 Wait for 2 sec.
1 : XX : XX
Display data
button.
Switch setting: 14 6 02 Check that the data changes to
1) NIGHT SHOT .................................................................. OFF “01”. (Note4)
2) DIGITAL ZOOM (Menu display) ................................... OFF 15 6 01 3F Set the data, and press PAUSE
3) STEADY SHOT (Menu display) ..................................... OFF button.
4) LIGHT (FK-1000 block) .................................................. OFF 16 0 03 04 Set the data.
17 1 Check that the display data (Note3)
satisfies the R ratio specified value.
19 1 Check that the display data (Note3)
satisfies the B ratio specified value.

42, 43.

button.
2 F B8 Set the data that is written down
at step 3, and press PAUSE button.
3 F B9 Set the data that is written down at
step 5, and press PAUSE button.
4 F BA Set the data that is written down at
5 F BB Set the data that is written down at
5-19
9. White Balance Check
Subject Clear chart
correction
ND filter 1.0 and 0.4 and 0.1
Measurement Point Video output terminal
Measuring Instrument Vectorscope
Specified Value Fig. 5-1-12. A to B
Switch setting:
1) NIGHT SHOT .................................................................. OFF
Checking method:
Order Page Address Data Procedure R-Y 2mm
Indoor white balance check
1 Check that the lens is not covered
with either filter. B-Y
2 6 01 0F Set the data, and press PAUSE

button. 2mm
3 Check that the center of the white
luminance point is within the circle Fig. 5-1-12. (A)
shown Fig. 5-1-12. A.
4 6 01 00 Set the data, and press PAUSE R-Y
button. B-Y
Outdoor white balance check 1.5mm
5 Place the C14 filter on the lens. 3mm
button.
7 Check that the center of the white 3mm
luminance point is within the circle
shown Fig. 5-1-12. B. Fig. 5-1-12. (B)
8 Remove the C14 filter.
LV data check
9 Place the ND filter 1.5
(1.0+0.1+0.4) on the lens.
button.
11 Wait for 2 sec.
13 1 Check that the display data (Note)
satisfies the specified value.
Specified value: 0000 to 0BC0
Note: Displayed data of the adjustment remote commander.

1 : XX : XX
Display data

button.
5-20
10. Angular Velocity Sensor Sensitivity Adjustment
Precautions on the Parts Replacement

There are two types of repair parts.
Type A: ENC03JA
Type B: ENC03JB
Replace the broken sensor with a same type sensor. If replace with
other type parts, the image will vibrate up and down or left and
right during hand-shake correction operations. After replacing, re-
adjust according to the adjusting method after replacement.
Precautions on Angular Velocity Sensor

The sensor incorporates a precision oscillator. Handle it with care
as if it dropped, the balance of the oscillator will be disrupted and
operations will not be performed properly.
Subject Arbitrary
Measurement Point Display data of page 1 (Note)
Adjustment Page F
Adjustment Address 5E, 5F
Specified Value 2900 to 4D00
Note: Displayed data of the adjustment remote commander.

1 : XX : XX
Display data
Switch setting:
1) STEADY SHOT (Menu display) ...................................... ON
2) ZOOM .......................................................................... Center
Adjusting method:
2 F 5E Set the following data, and press
PAUSE button.
51 (NTSC), 75 (PAL)
3 F 5F Set the following data, and press
PAUSE button.
4A (NTSC), 5A (PAL)
Pitch sensor check
(MI-041 board SE751)
Yaw sensor check
(MI-041 board SE752)

3 Move the camcorder, and check
that the steady shot operations
have been performed normally
5-21
1-4. MONOCHROME ELECTRONIC 1-4-2. Centering Adjustment
VIEWFINEDER SYSTEM ADJUSTMENTS Mode Playback
Signal Alignment tape :
Note: NTSC model: DCR-TRV130 For checking system operation
(WR5-5ND(NTSC))
(WR5-5CD(PAL))
1-4-1. Horizontal Slant Check
Monoscope section
Mode Playback
Specified Value ± 4%
For checking system operation Adjustment method:
(WR5-5ND(NTSC)) 1) Use the centering adjustment ring and adjust so that the left,
(WR5-5CD(PAL)) light, top, and bottom sides of the display are uniform. (Refer
Monoscope section to Fig. 5-1-14.)
Specified Value ± 1.5° Note: As the centering position changes due to earth magnetism,
rotate it 360° in the horizontal direction, and adjust with the
Adjustment method: center section of the modifying position.
1) Adjust RV904 (BRIGHT) (VF-129 board) so that the CRT can
be seen easily and clearly.
2) Check that the difference between the horizontal line and the
tilt of black mask satisfies the specified value.
±4%
θ ±4%
Adjustment value : ±4%
Holizontal line ±1.5 °
Fig. 5-1-15.
θ
Specified value : The image should be within ± 1.5 °

of the holizontal line.
1-4-3. Focus Adjustment
Fig. 5-1-13. Mode Playback
Aberration adjustment For checking system operation
Focus adjustment (WR5-5ND(NTSC))
DY tightening screw (WR5-5CD(PAL))
Monoscope section
Adjustment method:
1) Adjust the focus ring to obtain the optimum focus. (Refer to
Fig. 5-1-14.)
Centering adjustment
Fig. 5-1-14.
VF-129 BOARD
W901 RV903
C909
RV904
SOL901 IC901
F.B.T
CN902
5-22
1-4-4. Aberration Adjustment 1-4-5. Horizontal Amplitude Adjustment (VF-129 board)
Mode VTR stop Mode Playback
Signal Dot pattern Signal Alignment tape :
Specified Value b1 2 × a1 For checking system operation
b2 0.8 × a2 (WR5-5ND(NTSC))
(WR5-5CD(PAL))
Adjustment method: Monoscope section
1) Adjust the aberration adjustment ring so that the tracing of the Adjusting Element C909 (SOL901)
dot satisfies the specified value. Specified Value 12 ± 6%
2) If the centering becomes displaced here, perform the centering
adjustment from the beginning again. Adjustment method:
1) Rotate RV903, and adjust the top and bottom side of the
monoscope image to the top and bottom edges of the display.
2) Rotate RV904 so that the brightness is the normal level.
3) Solder or unsolder SOL901 pattern of the H size adjustment
capacitor (C909) to “short” or “open”, so that the horizontal
a2 a1
direction over scan becomes 12 ± 6% (Left and right totals).
b2
b1
100%
6% 6%
Fig. 5-1-16.
12.5% 12.5%
SOL901 Size H
Open Small
Short Big
Fig. 5-1-17.
VF-129 BOARD
W901 RV903
C909
RV904
SOL901 IC901
F.B.T
CN902
5-23
1-4-6. Vertical Amplitude Adjustment (VF-129 board) 1-4-7. Brightness Adjustment (VF-129 board)
Mode Playback Mode Playback
Signal Alignment tape : Signal Alignment tape :
For checking system operation For checking system operation
(WR5-5ND(NTSC)) (WR5-5ND(NTSC))
(WR5-5CD(PAL)) (WR5-5CD(PAL))
Monoscope section Monoscope section
Adjusting Element RV903 Adjusting Element RV904
Specified Value 10 ± 3%
Adjustment method:
Adjustment method: 1) Rotate RV904, and adjust so that the bright/dark sections of
1) Adjust RV903 so that the vertical direction over scan becomes gray scale are displayed correctly. (The bright section should
10 ± 3% (Top and bottom totals). be unsatisfactory till the cross hatch appears vague in the
monoscope circle. The dark section should be unsatisfactory
till the darkest section of the gray scale cannot be differentiate.)
5% 16.5%
1-4-8. Horizontal Amplitude, Vertical Amplitude, Focus

Check
100%
“1-4-5. Horizontal Amplitude Adjustment” and “1-4-6. Vertical
Amplitude Adjustment” should be both satisfy the specified values.
If not, perform the adjustments from the beginning again. In this
case, perform “1-4-7. Brightness Adjustment” again.
Moreover, check the focus, and if it found to be vague, perform “1-
5% 16.5% 4-3. Focus Adjustment” and “1-4-4. Aberration Adjustment”.
Fig. 5-1-18.
5-24
1-5. LCD SYSTEM ADJUSTMENT 1. LCD Initial Data Input (1)
Mode VTR stop
Note 1: The back light (fluorescent tube) is driven by a high voltage AC
Signal No signal
power supply. Therefore, do not touch the back light holder to
avoid electrical shock. Adjustment Page C
Note 2: When replacing the LCD unit, be careful to prevent damages Adjustment Address AB to BA
caused by static electricity.
Note 3: Set the LCD BRIGHT (Menu display) to the center.
Set the LCD COLOR (Menu display) to the center. Adjusting method:
Note 4: Connect the adjustment remote commander to CN1011 of VC- 1) Select page: 0, address: 01, and set data: 01.
256 board via CPC jig for BX/BK (J-6082-521-A). To operate the 2) Select page: C, and input the data in the following table.
adjustment remote commander, connect the AC power adapter Note: To write in the non-volatile memory (EEPROM), press the
(8.4Vdc) to the DC IN jack of CPC jig for BX/BK, or connect the PAUSE button of the adjustment remote commander each time
L series Info-LITHIUM battery to the battery terminal of CPC jig to set the data.
for BX/BK. 3) Select page: 0, address: 01, and set data: 00.
[Adjusting connector] Address Data Remark

Most of the measuring points for adjusting the LCD system are AB 53 Fixed data
concentrated in CN5502 of the PD-131 board. Connect the AC 00 Fixed data
measuring instruments via the multi CPC jig (J-6082-311-A). The AD 90 Fixed data
following table shows the Pin No. and signal name of CN5502. AE CB Fixed data
Pin No. Signal Name Pin No. Signal Name AF 66 Fixed data
1 VB 2 XVD OUT B0 26 Fixed data
3 VG 4 PANEL COM/PSIG B1 00 Fixed data
5 VR 6 PANEL ID B2 00 Fixed data
7 C-SYNC/XHD 8 XHD OUT B3 20 Fixed data
9 GND 10 GND B4 0A Fixed data
Table. 5-1-8. B5 24 Fixed data
B6 1A Fixed data
B7 08 Fixed data
B8 17 Fixed data
PD-131 board B9 21 Fixed data
BA 23 Fixed data
Table 5-1-9.
CN5502
9 10
1 2
5-25
2. LCD Initial Data Input (2) 3. VCO Adjustment (PD-131 board)
Mode VTR stop Set the VCO free-run frequency. If deviated, the LCD screen will
be blurred.
Signal No signal
Mode VTR stop
Adjustment Page D
Signal No signal
Adjustment Address A0 to B1
Measurement Point Pin 8 of CN5502 (XHD OUT)
Adjusting method: Measuring Instrument Frequency counter
1) Select page: 0, address: 01, and set data: 01. Adjustment Page D
2) Select page: D, and input the data in the following table.
Adjustment Address A2, A3
Note: To write in the non-volatile memory (EEPROM), press the
PAUSE button of the adjustment remote commander each time Specified Value f = 15734 ± 30Hz (NTSC)
to set the data. f = 15625 ± 30Hz (PAL)
Address Data Remark Adjusting method:
A0 78 Fixed data Order Page Address Data Procedure
A1 A4 Fixed data 1 0 01 01 Set the data.
A2 80 VCO adj. 2 D A2 Change the data and set the VCO
A3 70 Fixed data frequency (f) to the specified value.
A4 80 V-COM adj. 3 D A2 Press PAUSE button.
A5 20 RGB AMP adj. 4 D A2 Read the data, and this data is
A6 00 Fixed data named DA2.
A7 80 COM AMP adj. 5 Convert DA2 to decimal notation,
and obtain DA2’. (Note)
A8 80 White balance adj.
A9 80 White balance adj. 6 Calculate DA3’ using following
equations (Decimal calculation)
AA 30 Contrast adj.
NTSC model
AB 00 Fixed data When DA2’ 232
AC 0A Fixed data DA3’=DA2’+23
AD 0E Fixed data When DA2’>232
AE 9F Fixed data DA3’=255
AF 1F Fixed data PAL model
When DA2’ 20
B0 FC Fixed data
DA3’= DA2’–20
B1 FF Fixed data When DA2’< 20
Table 5-1-10. DA3’= 0
7 Convert DA3’ to a hexadecimal
number, and obtain DA3. (Note)
8 D A3 DA3 Set the data, and press PAUSE
button.
Note: Refer to “Table 5-4-1. Hexadecimal-decimal Conversion Table”.
5-26
4. RGB AMP Adjustment (PD-131 board) 5. Contrast Adjustment (PD-131 board)
Set the D range of the RGB decoder used to drive the LCD to the Set the level of the VIDEO signal for driving the LCD to the specified
specified value. If deviated, the LCD screen will become blackish value. If deviated, the screen image will be blackish or saturated
or saturated (whitish). (whitish).
Mode VTR stop Mode VTR stop
Signal No signal Signal No signal
Measurement Point Pin 3 of CN5502 (VG) Measurement Point Pin 3 of CN5502 (VG)
External trigger: Pin 4 of CN5502 External trigger: Pin 4 of CN5502
(PANEL COM) (PANEL COM)
Measuring Instrument Oscilloscope Measuring Instrument Oscilloscope
Adjustment Page D Adjustment Page D
Adjustment Address A5 Adjustment Address AA
Specified Value A = 2.80 ± 0.05V Specified Value A = 2.80 ± 0.07V
Adjusting method: Adjusting method:

Order Page Address Data Procedure Order Page Address Data Procedure
1 0 01 01 Set the data. 1 0 01 01 Set the data.
2 D A5 Change the data and set the voltage 2 D AA Change the data and set the voltage
(A) between the reversed waveform (A) between the 100 IRE and 0 IRE
pedestal and non-reversed waveform (pedestal) to the specified value.
pedestal to the specified value. (The data should be “00” to “7F”.)
(The data should be “00” to “3F”) 3 D AA Press PAUSE button.
3 D A5 Press PAUSE button. 4 0 01 00 Set the data.
Pedestal 100 IRE
A A
2H
2H
0 IRE
Pedestal Fig. 5-1-20.
Fig. 5-1-19.
5-27
6. COM AMP Adjustment (PD-131 board) 7. V-COM Adjustment (PD-131 board)
Set the common electrode drive signal level of LCD to the specified Set the DC bias of the common electrode drive signal of LCD to the
value. specified value.
Mode VTR stop If deviated, the LCD display will move, producing flicker and
conspicuous vertical lines.
Signal No signal
Mode VTR stop
Measurement Point Pin 4 of CN5502 (PANEL COM)
Signal No signal
Measuring Instrument Oscilloscope
Measurement Point Check on LCD display
Adjustment Page D
Adjustment Address A7
Adjustment Page D
Specified Value A = 5.40 ± 0.05V (NTSC)
A = 5.35 ± 0.05V (PAL) Adjustment Address A4
Specified Value The brightness difference between the
Adjusting method: section A and section B is minimum.
Note: This adjustment should be carried out upon completion of the
1 0 01 01 Set the data. following adjustments.
2 D A7 Change the data and set the RGB AMP Adjustment
PANEL COM signal level (A) to Contrast Adjustment
the specified value. COM AMP Adjustment
3 D A7 Press PAUSE button.

Adjusting method:
2 D A4 Change the data so that the
brightness of the section A and
that of the section B is equal.
3 D A4 Subtract 8 from the data.
A 5 0 01 00 Set the data.
B A
2H
A B
Fig. 5-1-21.
B A
A B
Fig. 5-1-22.
5-28
8. White Balance Adjustment (PD-131 board)
Correct the white balance.
If deviated, the reproduction of the LCD screen may degenerate.
Mode VTR stop
Signal No signal
Measurement Point Check on LCD screen
Adjustment Page D
Adjustment Address A8, A9
Specified Value The LCD screen should not be colored.
Note1: Check the white balance only when replacing the following parts.
If necessary, adjust them.
1. LCD panel
2. Light induction plate
3. IC5501
Adjusting method:
2 D A8 80 Set the data, and press PAUSE
button.
3 D A9 80 Set the data, and press PAUSE
button.
4 D A9 Check that the LCD screen is not
colored. If not colored, proceed to
step 10.
5 D A8 Change the data so that the LCD
screen is not colored.
7 D A9 Change the data so that the LCD
screen is not colored.
9 D A9 If the LCD screen is colored,
repeat steps 5 to 9.
5-29
5-2. MECHANISM SECTION 2-3. HOW TO ENTER PLAYBACK MODE
ADJUSTMENT WITHOUT CASSETTE
1) Connect the adjustment remote commander.
Mechanism Section adjustments, checks, and replacement of
2) Turn the HOLD switch of the adjustment remote commander
mechanism parts, refer to the separate volume “8mm Video
to the ON position.
Mechanical Adjustment Manual IX M2000 Mechanism ”.
3) Close the cassette compartment without the cassette.
4) Select page: 3, address: 01, and set data: 0B, and press the
2-1. ADJUSTMENT REMOTE COMMANDER
PAUSE button of the adjustment remote commander.
Connect the adjustment remote commander to CN1011 of VC-256
(The mechanism enters the playback mode automatically.)
board via CPC jig for BX/BK (J-6082-521-A). To operate the Note: The function buttons becomes inoperable.
adjustment remote commander, connect the AC power adapter 5) To quit the playback mode, select page: 3, address: 01, set data:
(8.4Vdc) to the DC IN jack of CPC jig for BX/BK, or connect the L 00, and press the PAUSE button of the adjustment remote
series Info-LITHIUM battery to the battery terminal of CPC jig for commander. (Whenever you want to quit the playback mode,
BX/BK. be sure to quit following this procedure.)
2-2. HOW TO ENTER RECORD MODE WITHOUT

CASSETTE

2) Turn the HOLD switch of the adjustment remote commander
to the ON position.
3) Close the cassette compartment without the cassette.
4) Select page: 3, address: 01, and set data: 0C, and press the
PAUSE button of the adjustment remote commander.
(The mechanism enters the record mode automatically.)
Note: The function buttons becomes inoperable.
5) To quit the record mode, select page: 3, address: 01, set data:
00, and press the PAUSE button of the adjustment remote
commander. (Whenever you want to quit the record mode, be
sure to quit following this procedure.)
TG3 TG4 TG5 TG6
TG2 Capstan shaft
TG7
Drum
TG1 Pinch roller
T reel
S reel
Fig. 5-2-1.
5-30
2-4. TAPE PATH ADJUSTMENT
2-4-1. Preparations for Adjustment

1) Clean the tape path face (tape guide, drum, capstan shaft, pinch
roller). Normal
3) Turn on the HOLD switch of the adjustment remote
commander. CH1
5) Connect the oscilloscope to CPC jig for BX/BK.
Channel 1: PB RF (MON)
Channel 2: SWP
Note: Connect a 75Ω resistor between the test point PB RF (MON) CH2
and GND.
75Ω resistor (Parts code: 1-247-804-11)
6) Playback the SW/OL standard tape. (WR5-2D)
7) Check that the oscilloscope RF waveform is flat at the entrance
and exit. Entrance side faulty
If not flat, perform the following section 2-4-2. until it is flat.
8) Perform “Processing after operations”, after completing
adjustment.
CH1
Test point of CPC jig for BX/BK
Pin No. Signal Name Pin No. Signal Name
3 BL 1 EVF VCO
CH2
7 EVF VG 5 BL 4.75
9 PB RF (MON)
13 BPF MONI 10 GND
17 TMS 15 REC RF (RF IN)
20 TDI 19 TDO Exit side faulty
16 SWP 18 TCK
8 CAP FG 14 IR VIDEO
Note: Pin No. are those of CN1011 of VC-256 board. CH1
Table 5-2-1.
[Processing after operations]

1) Connect the adjustment remote commander, and turn on the CH2
HOLD switch.
3) Remove the power supply from the unit.
Fig. 5-2-2.
5-31
2-4-2. Tape Path adjustment
1) Playback the SW/OL standard tape. (WR5-2D)

2) Turn the tape guide No.3 and No.6 alternately until the
waveform becomes flat. (Fig. 5-2-5.)
Note: Zenith adjustment screws for the TG3 and TG6 do not need to
be adjusted.
[Entrance side adjustment]
3) Turn the No.3 guide slowly in the clockwise direction until the
waveform amplitude at the entrance side begins to become
small. (Fig. 5-2-6. (A))
Confirm the rotation angle (A) of the No.3 guide. Fig. 5-2-5.
4) Turn the No.3 guide slowly in the counterclockwise direction
until the waveform becomes flat. (Fig. 5-2-5.) Entrance side amplitude
until the waveform amplitude at the entrance side begins to
become small. (Fig. 5-2-6. (B))
Confirm the rotation angle (B) of the No.3 guide.
6) Turn the No.3 guide slowly in the clockwise direction and set
up in the angle (C) in the middle of the rotation angle (A) and
the rotation angle (B). (Fig. 5-2-4.)
[Exit side adjustment]
7) Turn the No.6 guide slowly in the clockwise direction until the
waveform amplitude at the exit side begins to become small.
(Fig. 5-2-7. (A))
Confirm the rotation angle (A) of the No.6 guide. Fig. 5-2-6. (A)
until the waveform becomes flat. (Fig. 5-2-5.) Entrance side amplitude
until the waveform amplitude at the exit side begins to become
small. (Fig. 5-2-7. (B))
Confirm the rotation angle (B) of the No.6 guide.
10) Turn the No.3 guide slowly in the clockwise direction and set
up in the angle (C) in the middle of the rotation angle (A) and
the rotation angle (B). (Fig. 5-2-4.)
No.6 guide
(TG6)
Fig. 5-2-6. (B)
No.3 guide Exit side amplitude
(TG3)
Guide zenith adjustment screw
Fig. 5-2-3. Fig. 5-2-7. (A)

Exit side amplitude
C
B A
No.3 guide
or
No.6 guide
Fig. 5-2-4.
Fig. 5-2-7. (B)
5-32
2-4-3. No.7 Guide (TG7) Adjustment 2-5. CHECKS AFTER ADJUSTMENTS
1) Playback a tape in REV mode. 2-5-1. Waveform Build-up Check

2) Confirm that tape slack dose not occur in between the guide 1) Playback the SW/OL standard tape.
No.6 (TG6) 1 and capstan 2. If the tape slack is found, turn 2) Eject the tape once, insert and load the tape.
the height adjustment screw 4 of the Guide No.7 (TG7) 3 3) Start playing back the tape and confirm that the RF waveform
until tape slack is removed. builds up in three seconds with flat envelope. Confirm at this
3) Playback a tape in normal mode. Confirm that tape slack dose time that tape slack dose not occur near pinch roller.
not occur in between the guide No.7 (TG7) 3 and capstan 2. 4) Playback the tape in CUE/REV and FF/REW modes
(Specification = 0.5 mm or less) If the tape slack of more than respectively. Confirm that the RF waveform builds up in three
0.5 mm is found, turn the height adjustment screw 4 until the seconds with flat envelope. Confirm at this time that tape slack
slack is 0.5 mm or less. Playback a tape in REV mode and dose not occur near pinch roller.
confirm that tape slack occurred in between the guide No.6 5) Repeat the check items 2) to 5) again.
(TG6) 1 and capstan 2 is 0.3 mm or less, the adjustment is
complete.
2 Capstan Capstan
1 No.6 guide No.7 guide No.6 guide

4 TG7 nut (TG7)
(TG6) (TG6)
3 No.7 guide
(TG7)
Tape slack Tape slack
Fig. 5-2-8. Fig. 5-2-10.
2-4-4. CUE, REV Waveforms Check 2-5-2. Tape Path Check

1) Playback the SW/OL standard tape (WR5-2D) in REV mode. 1) Insert a thin video tape such as P6-120MP (NTSC) or P5-
Confirm that pitches between the peaks of the waveform are 120MP (PAL). Playback the thin tape. Confirm that there is no
equally spaced for 5 seconds or longer. clearance or curl of 0.3 mm or more at the following points:
The pitches are not equally spaced, perform section “2-4-2. Upper flange of guide No.3, upper flange of guide No. 6, upper
Tape path Adjustment” and section “2-4-3. No.7 Guide (TG7) and lower flanges of guide No.7,
Adjustment”. 2) Confirm that there is no clearance or curl of 0.3 mm or more at
2) Playback the SW/OL standard tape in CUE mode. each tape guide when the FF button is pressed from the playback
Confirm that pitches between the peaks of the waveform are mode to enter the CUE mode, and when the REW button is
equally spaced for 5 seconds or longer. pressed from the playback mode to enter the REV mode.
The pitches are not equally spaced, perform section “2-4-2.
Tape path Adjustment”.
No.1 guide
(TG1)
No.6 guide No.3 guide
a b c d (TG6) (TG3)
No.7 guide
(TG7) Pinch roller
Drum
Fig. 5-2-9.
Capstan
Fig. 5-2-11.
5-33
5-3. VIDEO SECTION ADJUSTMENT
3-1. PREPARATIONS BEFORE ADJUSTMENTS
Use the following measuring instruments for video section

adjustments.
3-1-1. Equipment to Required
1) TV monitor
2) Oscilloscope (dual-phenomenon, band width above 30 MHz
with delay mode) (Unless specified otherwise, use a 10 : 1
probe.)
3) Frequency counter
4) Pattern generator with video output terminal
5) Digital voltmeter
6) Audio generator
7) Audio level meter
8) Audio distortion meter
9) Audio attenuator
10) Regulated power supply
11) Digital8 alignment tapes
• SW/OL standard (WR5-2D)
Parts code: 8-967-993-22
• Audio operation check for NTSC (WR5-3ND)
Parts code: 8-967-993-32
• System operation check for NTSC (WR5-5ND)
Parts code: 8-967-993-42
• Audio operation check for PAL (WR5-3CD)
Parts code: 8-967-993-37
• System operation check for PAL (WR5-5CD)
Parts code: 8-967-993-47
12) Adjustment remote commander (J-6082-053-B)
13) CPC jig for BX/BK (J-6082-521-A)
14) IR receiver jig (J-6082-383-A) *1
15) Media converter (DVMC-DA1) *1
*1: NTSC model only.
5-34
3-1-2. Precautions on Adjusting
1) Connect the adjustment remote commander to CN1011 of VC- Note1: Setting the “Forced VTR Power ON” mode (VTR mode)
256 board via CPC jig for BX/BK (J-6082-521-A). To operate 1) Select page: 0, address: 01, and set data: 01.
the adjustment remote commander, connect the AC power 2) Select page: D, address: 10, set data: 02, and press the PAUSE
adapter to the DC IN jack of CPC jig for BX/BK, or connect button.
The above procedure will enable the VTR power to be turned on
the L series Info-LITHIUM battery to the battery terminal of
with the control switch block (SS-1000) removed.
CPC jig for BX/BK. After completing adjustments, be sure to exit the “Forced VTR
2) The adjustments of this unit are performed in the VTR mode Power ON mode”.
or camera mode. Note2: Setting the “Forced Camera Power ON” mode (Camera mode)
To set to the VTR mode, set the power switch to “VCR or 1) Select page: 0, address: 01, and set data: 01.
PLAYER” or set the “Forced VTR Power ON mode” using the 2) Select page: D, address: 10, set data: 01, and press the PAUSE
adjustment remote commander (Note1). button.
To set to the Camera mode, set the power switch to “CAMERA” The above procedure will enable the camera power to be turned
on with the control switch block (SS-1000) removed.
or set the “Forced Camera Power ON mode” using the
After completing adjustments, be sure to exit the “Forced Camera
adjustment remote commander (Note2). Power ON mode”.
After completing adjustments, be sure to exit the “Forced VTR Note3: Exiting the “Forced Power ON” mode
Power ON Mode” or “Forced Camera Power ON Mode”. 1) Select page: 0, address: 01, and set data: 01.
(Note3) 2) Select page: D, address: 10, set data: 00, and press the PAUSE
3) The front panel block (MI-041 board, microphone unit, video button.
light) need not be connected except during “IR transmitter 3) Select page: 0, address: 01, and set data: 00.
adjustment (DCR-TRV130)”. To remove, disconnect the Note4: When the FK-1000 block or the CF-1000 block/CF-077 board is
removed, the VTR does an unusual movement for one after the
following connector.
power is turned on.
MI-041 board CN1002 (24P 0.5mm)
4) As removing the cabinet (R) assembly (removing CN1007 of
the VC-256 board) means removing the lithium 3V power
supply (CF-1000 block BT101), data such as date, time, user-
set menus will be lost. After completing adjustments, reset these
data. If the cabinet (R) assembly has been removed, the self-
diagnosis data, data on history of use (total drum rotation time
etc.) will be lost. Before removing, note down the self-diagnosis
data (data of page: 2, address: B0 to C6) and the data on history
use (data of page: 2, address: A2 to AA and E0 to E2). (Refer
to “5-4.Service Mode”.)
5) The cabinet (R) assembly (CF-1000 block, LCD block) need
not be connected to operate the VTR block.(Note4) When
removing the cabinet (R) assembly, disconnect the following
connectors.
1. VC-256 board CN1007 (24P, 0.5mm)
2. VC-256 board CN1003 (20P, 0.8mm)
6) The lens block (CD-281 board) need not be connected. To
remove, disconnect the following connectors.
1. VC-256 board CN1501 (14P, 0.5mm)
2. VC-256 board CN1551 (24P, 0.5mm)
7) The EVF block (VF-129 board) need not be connected. To
remove, disconnect the following connectors.
VC-256 board CN1006 (4P, 1.0mm)
8) By setting the “Forced VTR Power ON mode” or “Forced
Camera Power ON mode”, the video section can be operate
even if the control switch block (SS-1000) has been removed.
When removing the control switch block (SS-1000), disconnect
the following connector.
VC-256 board CN1009 (5P 0.8mm)
5-35
3-1-3. Adjusting Connectors
Some of the adjusting points of the video section are concentrated
in CN1011 of VC-256 board. Connect the Measuring instruments
CN1011
and the adjustment remote commander via the CPC jig for BX/BK 1 2
(J-6082-521-A) to CN1011. To operate the adjustment remote
commander, connect the AC power adapter to the DC IN jack of
CPC jig for BX/BK, or connect the L series Info-LITHIUM battery 19 20
to the battery terminal of CPC jig for BX/BK.
The following table shows the Pin No. and signal name of CN1011.

1 VCO 2 XLANC POWER ON
3 EVF BL 4 LANC IN
5 EVF BL 4.75V 6 LANC OUT
7 EVF VG 8 CAP FG
9 PB RF 10 REG GND
11 REG GND 12 REG GND
13 BPF MONI 14 IR VIDEO
15 REC RF 16 RF SWP Remove the
17 NC 18 NC CPC lid
19 NC 20 NC
Fig. 5-3-1.
Table 5-3-1.
The following table shows the arrangement of the test points of

CPC jig for BX/BK. (Pin No. are those of CN1011.)
3 BL 1 EVF VCO
7 EVF VG 5 BL 4.75
9 PB RF (MON)
13 BPF MONI 10 GND
17 TMS 15 REC RF (RF IN)
20 TDI 19 TDO
16 SWP 18 TCK
8 CAP FG 14 IR VIDEO
Table 5-3-2.
3-1-4. Connecting the Equipment

Connect the measuring instruments as shown in Fig. 5-3-2 and
perform the adjustments.
TV monitor
VIDEO
(Yellow)
Main unit
Adjustment
remote
commander
AUDIO (Black)
LANC jack A/V OUT jack
Fig. 5-3-2.
5-36
3-1-5. Alignment Tape
The following table lists alignment tapes which are available.
Use the tape specified in the signal column for each adjustment. If
the type of tape to be used for checking operations is not specified,
use whichever type.
Digital8 alignment tape

Name Usage
SW/OL standard Switching position adjustment
(WR5-2D)
Audio operation check Audio system adjustment
(WR5-3ND),
System operation check Operation check
(WR5-5ND)
Fig.5-3-3. shows the 75% color bar signals recorded on the alignment tape.
Note: Measure using the VIDEO terminal (Terminated at 75Ω).
For NTSC model

White (100%)
Yellow
Cyan
Magenta
Green
White (75%)
Magenta
Red
White
Burst signal
Blue
Yellow
Green
Cyan
Red
Blue
0.714V
(75%)
1V
0.286V
0.286V Q I Black
Q I
White
(100%)
Horizontal sync signal
Color bar signal waveform Color bar pattern
For PAL model

White (100%)
Yellow
Green
Cyan
Magenta
Red
Blue
0.7V
Magenta
Green
Yellow
1V
Cyan
White
Red
Blue
Black
0.3V
0.3V (100%)
Burst signal
Horizontal sync signal
Color bar signal waveform Color bar pattern
Fig. 5-3-3. Color bar signal of alignment tapes
3-1-6. Output Level and Impedance

Video output
Stereo minijack,
1Vp-p, 75Ω, unbalanced, sync negative
S video output
4-pin mini DIN
Luminance signal:
1Vp-p, 75Ω, unbalanced, sync negative
Chrominance signal:
0.286Vp-p, 75Ω, unbalanced (NTSC)
0.300Vp-p, 75Ω, unbalanced (PAL)
Audio output
Stereo minijack:
–7.5dBs, (at load impedance 47kΩ), impedance less than
2.2kΩ
5-37
3-2. SYSTEM CONTROL SYSTEM ADJUSTMENT 2-2. Serial No. Input
Write the serial No. and model code in the EEPROM (nonvolatile
1. Initialization of C, D, E, F, 7, 8 Page Data memory). Convert the serial No. on the name plate from decimal to
If the C, D, E, F, 7, 8 page data is erased due to some reason, perform hexadecimal, and write in the EEPROM.
“1-2. INITIALIZATION OF C, D, E, F, 7, 8 PAGE DATA”, of “5-1. Page C
CAMERA SECTION ADJUSTMENT”. Address ED, EE, EF
2. Serial No. Input Input method:
2-1. Company ID Input 1) Select page: 0, address: 01, and set data: 01.
Write the company ID in the EEPROM (nonvolatile memory). 2) Read the serial No. on the name plate, and take it as D1.
Page C Example: If the serial No. is 77881.
Address E8, E9, EA, EB, EC D1=77881
Note: Use six digits of the low rank when a serial No. is more than
Input method: seven digits.
1) Select page: 0, address: 01, and set data: 01. 3) Obtain D2 and H1 corresponding to D1 from Table 5-3-3.
2) Input the following data to page: C, addresses: E8 to EC. Example: If D1 is “77881”.
Note: Press the PAUSE button of the adjustment remote commander D2=D1–65536=12345
each time to set the data. H1=FE
H1 (Hexadecimal)
Address Data D1 (Decimal) D2 (Decimal)
(Service model code)
E8 08
000001 to 065535 D1 FE
E9 00
065536 to 131071 D1–65536 FE
EA 46
131072 to 196607 D1–131072 FE
EB 01
EC 02 Table 5-3-3.
3) Select page: 0, address: 01, and set data: 00. 4) Input H1 to page: C, address: ED. (Model code input)
Example: If H1 is “FE”.
Select page: C, address: ED, set data: FE, and
press the PAUSE button.
5) Obtain the maximum decimal not exceeding D2 from Table 5-
3-4, and take this as D3.
Example: If D2 is “12345”.
D3=12288
6) Obtain the hexadecimal corresponding to D3 from Table 5-3-4,
and take this as H3.
H3=3000
7) Obtain the difference D4 between D 2 and D 3. (Decimal
calculation, 0 D4 255)
D4= D2–D3
Example: If D2 is “12345” and D3 is “12288”.
D4=12345–12288=57
8) Convert D4 to hexadecimal, and take this as H4.
(Refer to “Hexadecimal-decimal conversion table” in “5-4.
Service Mode”.)
H4=39
9) Input the upper 2 digits of H3 to page: C, address: EE.
Example: If H3 is “3000”.
Select page: C, address: EE, set data: 30, and
10) Input H4 to page: C, address: EF.
Example: If H4 is “39”.
Select page: C, address: EF, set data: 39, and
5-38
Hexa- Hexa- Hexa- Hexa- Hexa- Hexa- Hexa- Hexa-
Decimal decimal Decimal decimal Decimal decimal Decimal decimal Decimal decimal Decimal decimal Decimal decimal Decimal decimal
(D3) (H3) (D3) (H3) (D3) (H3) (D3) (H3) (D3) (H3) (D3) (H3) (D3) (H3) (D3) (H3)
0 0000 8192 2000 16384 4000 24576 6000 32768 8000 40960 A000 49152 C000 57344 E000
256 0100 8448 2100 16640 4100 24832 6100 33024 8100 41216 A100 49408 C100 57600 E100
512 0200 8704 2200 16896 4200 25088 6200 33280 8200 41472 A200 49664 C200 57856 E200
768 0300 8960 2300 17152 4300 25344 6300 33536 8300 41728 A300 49920 C300 58112 E300
1024 0400 9216 2400 17408 4400 25600 6400 33792 8400 41984 A400 50176 C400 58368 E400
1280 0500 9472 2500 17664 4500 25856 6500 34048 8500 42240 A500 50432 C500 58624 E500
1536 0600 9728 2600 17920 4600 26112 6600 34304 8600 42496 A600 50688 C600 58880 E600
1792 0700 9984 2700 18176 4700 26368 6700 34560 8700 42752 A700 50944 C700 59136 E700
2048 0800 10240 2800 18432 4800 26624 6800 34816 8800 43008 A800 51200 C800 59392 E800
2304 0900 10496 2900 18688 4900 26880 6900 35072 8900 43264 A900 51456 C900 59648 E900
2560 0A00 10752 2A00 18944 4A00 27136 6A00 35328 8A00 43520 AA00 51712 CA00 59904 EA00
2816 0B00 11008 2B00 19200 4B00 27392 6B00 35584 8B00 43776 AB00 51968 CB00 60160 EB00
3072 0C00 11264 2C00 19456 4C00 27648 6C00 35840 8C00 44032 AC00 52224 CC00 60416 EC00
3328 0D00 11520 2D00 19712 4D00 27904 6D00 36096 8D00 44288 AD00 52480 CD00 60672 ED00
3584 0E00 11776 2E00 19968 4E00 28160 6E00 36352 8E00 44544 AE00 52736 CE00 60928 EE00
3840 0F00 12032 2F00 20224 4F00 28416 6F00 36608 8F00 44800 AF00 52992 CF00 61184 EF00
4096 1000 12288 3000 20480 5000 28672 7000 36864 9000 45056 B000 53248 D000 61440 F000
4352 1100 12544 3100 20736 5100 28928 7100 37120 9100 45312 B100 53504 D100 61696 F100
4608 1200 12800 3200 20992 5200 29184 7200 37376 9200 45568 B200 53760 D200 61952 F200
4864 1300 13056 3300 21248 5300 29440 7300 37632 9300 45824 B300 54016 D300 62208 F300
5120 1400 13312 3400 21504 5400 29696 7400 37888 9400 46080 B400 54272 D400 62464 F400
5376 1500 13568 3500 21760 5500 29952 7500 38144 9500 46336 B500 54528 D500 62720 F500
5632 1600 13824 3600 22016 5600 30208 7600 38400 9600 46592 B600 54784 D600 62976 F600
5888 1700 14080 3700 22272 5700 30464 7700 38656 9700 46848 B700 55040 D700 63232 F700
6144 1800 14336 3800 22528 5800 30720 7800 38912 9800 47104 B800 55296 D800 63488 F800
6400 1900 14592 3900 22784 5900 30976 7900 39168 9900 47360 B900 55552 D900 63744 F900
6656 1A00 14848 3A00 23040 5A00 31232 7A00 39424 9A00 47616 BA00 55808 DA00 64000 FA00
6912 1B00 15104 3B00 23296 5B00 31488 7B00 39680 9B00 47872 BB00 56064 DB00 64256 FB00
7168 1C00 15360 3C00 23552 5C00 31744 7C00 39936 9C00 48128 BC00 56320 DC00 64512 FC00
7424 1D00 15616 3D00 23808 5D00 32000 7D00 40192 9D00 48384 BD00 56576 DD00 64768 FD00
7680 1E00 15872 3E00 24064 5E00 32256 7E00 40448 9E00 48640 BE00 56832 DE00 65024 FE00
7936 1F00 16128 3F00 24320 5F00 32512 7F00 40704 9F00 48896 BF00 57088 DF00 65280 FF00
Table 5-3-4.
5-39
3-3. SERVO AND RF SYSTEM ADJUSTMENT 2. CAP FG Duty Adjustment (VC-256 Board)
Before perform the servo and RF system adjustments, check that Set the Cap FG signal duty cycle to 50% to establish an appropriate
the specified value of “27MHz Origin Oscillation Adjustment” of capstan servo. If deviated, the uneven rotation of capstan and noise
“VIDEO SYSTEM ADJUSTMENT” is satisfied. can occur in the SLOW playback mode.
Mode Playback without cassette
Adjusting Procedure: Signal No signal
1. REEL FG adjustment
2. Cap FG duty adjustment Measurement Point Display data of page: 6, address: 02
3. PLL fo & LPF fo pre-adjustment Measuring Instrument Adjustment remote commander
4. Switching position adjustment Adjustment Page F
5. AGC center level Adjustment Address 64
6. APC & AEQ adjustment
7. PLL fo & LPF fo fine adjustment Specified value 01
1. REEL FG Adjustment (VC-256 Board) Adjusting method:

Compensates the dispersion of the hall elements. Order Page Address Data Procedure
Measurement Point Display data of page: 3, address: 03 1 Close the cassette compartment
Measuring Instrument Adjustment remote commander without inserting a cassette.
Adjustment Page C 2 0 01 01 Set the data.
Adjustment Address 17, 30 3 D 10 12 Set the data, and press PAUSE
button.
Specified Value 00 or 01 or 04 or 05
4 8 0A FD Set the data, and press PAUSE
Adjusting method: button.
Order Page Address Data Procedure 5 8 2A C8 Set the data, and press PAUSE
button.
1 Close the cassette compartment
without inserting a cassette. 6 Set to the playback mode without
cassette.
3 3 01 1C Set the data, and press PAUSE button.
button.
4 3 02 Check that the data changes to button.
“00”,
5 3 03 Check that the data is “00” or “01” within 6 seconds. If not,
“01” or “04” or “05”. (Note) return to step 7.
6 0 01 00 Set the data. 10 6 01 00 Set the data, press PAUSE
button.
Note: If the data is other value, adjustment has errors. (Take an appropriate
remedial measures according to the errors referring to the following 11 D 10 00 Set the data, and press PAUSE
table.) button.
12 8 0A FF Set the data, and press PAUSE
Data Contents of defect button.
02, 03, 06, 07 T reel is defective 13 8 2A 00 Set the data, and press PAUSE
08, 09, 0C, 0D S reel is defective button.
0A, 0B, 0E, 0F S reel and T reel are defective 14 0 01 00 Set the data.
5-40
3. PLL fo & LPF fo Pre-Adjustment (VC-256 Board) 4. Switching Position Adjustment (VC-256 Board)
To obtain normal playback waveform output during the Digital8
Mode VTR stop playback mode, adjust the switching position.
Measurement Point Display data of page: 3, address: 03 Mode VTR playback
Measuring Instrument Adjustment remote commander Signal SW/OL reference tape (WR5-2D)
Adjustment Page C Measurement Point Display data of page: 3, address: 03
Adjustment Address 1F, 20, 22, 29 Measuring Instrument Adjustment remote commander
Specified Value The data of page: 3, address: 02 is “00”. Adjustment Page C
The data of page: 3, address: 03 is “00”. Adjustment Address 10, 11, 12, 13
Specified Value 00
Adjusting method:
Order Page Address Data Procedure Adjusting method:
1 0 01 01 Set the data. Order Page Address Data Procedure
2 3 01 30 Set the data, and press PAUSE 1 Insert the SW/OL reference tape
button. and enter the VTR STOP mode.
3 3 02 Check that the data changes to 2 0 01 01 Set the data.
“00” within 10 sec. (Note) 3 3 21 Check that the data is “02”.
4 3 03 Check that the data is “00”. (Note) (Note1)
5 0 01 00 Set the data. 4 3 01 0D Set the data, and press PAUSE
button.
Note: If it isn’t satisfied, select page: C, address: 21, set the following 5 3 02 Check that the data changes to
data, and press the PAUSE button, and repeat steps 2 to 4.
“00”.
6 3 03 Check that the data is “00”.
Setting data
(Note2)
When the data of page: C, address: 21 is “CA”. CE
7 C 10 Check that the data is “00” to “E6”.
When the data of page: C, address: 21 is “CE”. C6 (Note3)
When the data of page: C, address: 21 is “C6”. D2 8 0 01 00 Set the data.
When the data of page: C, address: 21 is “D2” C2
Note 1: If the data of page: 3, address: 21 is “72”, the tape top being played.
After playing the tape for 1 to 2 seconds, stop it, perform step 4
If bit2, bit3, bit4, bit5 or bit6 of page: 3, address: 03 data is “1”, and higher.
there are errors. Note 2: If bit 0 of the data is “1”, the A channel is defective. If bit 1 is “1”,
For the error contents, see the following table. (For the bit values, the B channel is defective. Contents of the defect is written into
page: C, addresses: 10 and 12. See the following table. (For the bit
refer to “5-4. SERVICE MODE”, “4-3. 3. Bit value discrimination”.)
values, refer to “5-4. SERVICE MODE”, “4-3. 3. Bit value
discrimination”. ) If bit3 of the data is “1”, the tape end being
Bit value of page: 3, Error contents played, and adjustment has errors.
Note 3: If the data is “E7” to “FF”, adjustment has errors.
address: 03 data
bit 2 = 1 or bit 3 = 1 PLL fo fine adjustment is defective When the A channel is defective
bit 4 = 1 or bit 5 = 1 PLL fo adjustment is defective Data of page:C, Contents of defect
bit 6 = 1 LPF fo is defective address:10
EE Writing into EEPROM (IC4502) is
defective
E8 Adjustment data is out of range
E7 No data is returned from IC3301
(CAIN)
When the B channel is defective

Data of page:C, Contents of defect
address:12
E8 Adjustment data is out of range
E7 No data is returned from IC3301
(CAIN)
5-41
5. AGC Center Level and APC & AEQ Adjustment 5-3. APC & AEQ Adjustment (VC-256 Board)
5-1. Preparations before adjustments Mode Playback

Mode Camera recording Signal Recorded signal at “Preparations
Subject Arbitrary before adjustments”
Measurement Point PB RF (MON) (Pin 9 of CN1011) (Note 1)
Note: Use a Hi8 MP tape.
Ext. trigger: SWP (Pin qh of CN1011)
Adjusting method: Measuring Instrument Oscilloscope
Order Page Address Data Procedure Adjustment Page C
1 0 01 01 Set the data. Adjustment Address 18, 19, 1B, 1C, 21, 2C
2 8 2A C8 Set the data. Specified Value The data of page: 3, address: 03 is “00”
3 Record the camera signal for three
minutes. Note 1: Connect a 75Ω resistor between PB RF (MON) and GND of CPC
jig.
5-2. AGC Center Level Adjustment (VC-256 Board) 75Ω resistor (Parts code: 1-247-804-11)
Note 2: The “AGC Center Level Adjustment” must have already been
Mode Playback completed before starting this adjustment.
Signal Recorded signal at “Preparations
before adjustments” Adjusting method:
Measurement Point PB RF (MON) (Pin 9 of CN1011) (Note 1) Order Page Address Data Procedure
Ext. trigger: SWP (Pin qh of CN1011) 1 0 01 01 Set the data.
Measuring Instrument Oscilloscope 2 C 18 25 Set the data, and press PAUSE button.
Adjustment Page C 3 C 19 25 Set the data, and press PAUSE button.
Adjustment Address 1E 4 C 1B 25 Set the data, and press PAUSE button.
Specified Value The data of page: 3, address: 03 is “00” 5 C 1C 25 Set the data, and press PAUSE button.
Note 1: Connect a 75Ω resistor between PB RF (MON) and GND of CPC 6 C 21 CA Set the data, and press PAUSE button.
jig. 7 C 2C 03 Set the data, and press PAUSE button.
75Ω resistor (Parts code: 1-247-804-11)
8 Playback the recorded signal at
Adjusting method: “Preparations before adjustments”
Order Page Address Data Procedure 9 2 2E 01
1 Playback the recorded signal at 10 3 33 08 Set the data.
“Preparations before adjustments” 11 Confirm that the playback RF
2 0 01 01 Set the data. signal is stable. (Fig. 5-3-5.)
3 2 2E 01 Set the data. 12 3 01 07 Set the data, and press PAUSE button.
4 3 33 08 Set the data. 13 3 02 Check that the data changes from
5 Confirm that the playback RF “07” to “00” in about 20 seconds
signal is stable. (Fig. 5-3-4.) after pressing PAUSE button.
6 3 01 23 Set the data, and press PAUSE button. 14 3 03 Check that the data is “00”.
(Note3)
15 Perform “Processing after
Completing Adjustments”.
(Note2)
9 Perform “APC & AEQ Adjustment”. Note 3: If the data is other than “00”, adjustment has errors.
Note 2: If the data of page: 3, address: 03 is other than “00”, adjustment

has errors.
PB RF signal is stable PB RF signal is stable
PB RF PB RF
SWP SWP
6.6 msec 6.6 msec
Fig. 5-3-4. Fig. 5-3-5.
5-42
5-4. Processing after Completing Adjustments 6. PLL fo & LPF fo Fine Adjustment (VC-256 Board)
Order Page Address Data Procedure Mode VTR stop

1 0 01 01 Set the data. Signal Arbitrary
2 2 2E 00 Set the data. Measurement Point Display data of page: 3
3 3 33 00 Set the data. Measuring Instrument Adjustment remote commander
4 8 2A 00 Set the data, and press PAUSE Adjustment Page C
button. Adjustment Address 1F, 20, 22, 29
5 0 01 00 Set the data. Specified Value The data of page: 3, address: 02 is “00”.
The data of page: 3, address: 03 is “00”.
Adjusting method:
button.
“00” within 10 sec.
(Note)
Note: If bit2, bit3, bit4, bit5 or bit 6 of the data is “1”, there are errors.
For the error contents, see the following table. (For the bit values, refer
to “5-4. SERVICE MODE”, “4-3. 3. Bit value discrimination”. )
Bit value of page: 3, Error contents

address: 03
bit 2 = 1 or bit 3 = 1 PLL fo fine adjustment is defective
bit 4 = 1 or bit 5 = 1 PLL fo adjustment is defective
bit 6 = 1 LPF fo is defective
5-43
3-4. VIDEO SYSTEM ADJUSTMENTS 2. Chroma BPF fo Adjustment (VC-256 Board)
Set the center frequency of IC3701 chroma band-pass filter.
1. 27MHz Origin Oscillation Adjustment Mode VTR stop
(VC-256 Board) Signal No signal
Set the frequency of the clock for synchronization.
If deviated, the synchronization will be disrupted and the color will Measurement Point CH1: Chroma signal terminal of S
become inconsistent. VIDEO OUT jack (75Ω terminated)
CH2: Y signal terminal of S VIDEO
Mode Camera OUT jack (75Ω terminated)
Subject Not required Measuring Instrument Oscilloscope
Measurement Point FB1502 (Pin qs of IC1501) or Adjustment Page C
Pin qh of IC1502
Adjustment Address 28
Measuring Instrument Frequency counter
Specified Value A = 100mVp-p or less
Adjustment Page F B = 200mVp-p or more
Adjustment Address 4D
Specified Value f=13500000 ± 68Hz Adjusting method:
Adjusting method: 1 0 01 01 Set the data.
Order Page Address Data Procedure 2 D 11 10 Set the data, and press PAUSE
1 0 01 01 Set the data. button.
2 F 4D Change the data and set the 3 Check that the burst signal (B) is
frequency (f) to the specified output to the chroma signal
value. terminal of S VIDEO OUT jack.
3 F 4D Press PAUSE button. 4 3 0C 04 Set the data, and press PAUSE
4 0 01 00 Set the data. button.
5 C 28 Change the data for minimum
amplitude of the burst signal
level (A).
(The data should be “00” to “07”.)
VC-256 BOARD
6 C 28 Press PAUSE button.
7 3 0C 00 Set the data, and press PAUSE
button.
IC1501 IC1502
36 25
8 Check that the burst signal level
36 25 37 24
37 24 (B) satisfies the specified value.
13 48 13
48
1 12 1 12 9 D 11 00 Set the data, and press PAUSE
FB1502 button.
When the data of page: 3, address: 0C, is 04:

A
CH1
Fig. 5-3-6. CH2
When the data of page: 3, address: 0C, is 00:
CH1 B
Fig. 5-3-7.
5-44
3. S VIDEO OUT Y Level Adjustment (VC-256 Board) 4. S VIDEO OUT Chroma Level Adjustment
(VC-256 Board)
Mode VTR stop Mode VTR stop
Signal No signal Signal No signal
Measurement Point Y signal terminal of S VIDEO OUT Measurement Point Chroma signal terminal of S VIDEO
jack (75Ω terminated) OUT jack (75Ω terminated)
Measuring Instrument Oscilloscope External trigger: Y signal terminal of
S VIDEO OUT jack
Adjustment Page C
Adjustment Address 25
Adjustment Page C
Specified Value A = 1000 ± 20mV
Adjustment Address 26, 27
Adjusting method: Specified Value Cr level: A = 714 ± 14mV (NTSC)
Order Page Address Data Procedure A = 700 ± 14mV (PAL)
Cb level: B = 714 ± 14mV (NTSC)
B = 700 ± 14mV (PAL)
2 D 11 10 Set the data, and press PAUSE Burst level: C = 286 ± 6mV (NTSC)
button. C = 300 ± 6mV (PAL)
button. Adjusting method:
4 C 25 Change the data and set the Y Order Page Address Data Procedure
signal level (A) to the specified 1 0 01 01 Set the data.
value.
2 D 11 10 Set the data, and press PAUSE
5 C 25 Press PAUSE button. button.
6 3 0C 00 Set the data, and press PAUSE 3 3 0C 02 Set the data, and press PAUSE
button. button.
7 D 11 00 Set the data, and press PAUSE 4 C 26 Change the data and set the Cr
button. signal level (A) to the specified
8 0 01 00 Set the data. value.
6 C 27 Change the data and set the Cb
Center of luminance line
signal level (B) to the specified
value.
A 8 Check that the burst signal level
(C) is satisfied the specified
value.
button.
H 10 D 11 00 Set the data, and press PAUSE
button.
Fig. 5-3-8. 11 0 01 00 Set the data.
A B
0.28 µsec 0.28 µsec

Fig. 5-3-9.
5-45
5. VIDEO OUT Y, Chroma Level Check (VC-256 Board)
Mode VTR stop

Signal No signal
Measurement Point Video terminal of AUDIO/VIDEO jack
(75Ω terminated)
Specified Value Sync level: A = 286 ± 18mV (NTSC)
A = 300 ± 18mV (PAL)
Burst level: B = 286 ± 18mV (NTSC)
B = 300 ± 18mV (PAL)
Adjusting method:
button.
button.
4 Check that the sync signal level
(A) satisfies the specified value.
5 Check that the burst signal level
(B) satisfies the specified value.
button.
button.
B
A
Fig. 5-3-10.
5-46
3-5. IR TRANSMITTER ADJUSTMENTS
(DCR-TRV130)
Adjust using the IR receiver jig (J-6082-383-A).

Note: If the distance between the IR receiver jig and the camcorder is
below 1m, cover the LASER LINK emitter with a ND filter. (For
example, when the distance is 30cm to 50cm, cover the LASER
LINK emitter with a ND filter 1.0.)
Switch setting:
SUPER LASER LINK ........................... ON (Red LED is lit)
1. IR Video Carrier Frequency Adjustment 2. IR Video Deviation Adjustment (MI-041 Board)

(MI-041 Board)
Mode VTR stop
Mode VTR stop Signal Arbitrary
Signal Arbitrary Measurement Point VIDEO OUT terminal of IR receiver
Measurement Point Pin 5 of CN003 of IR receiver jig (RF) jig (Terminated at 75Ω)
(Or Pin qh of IC3901 of MI-041 board) Measuring Instrument Oscilloscope
Measuring Instrument Frequency counter Adjustment Page F
Adjustment Page F Adjustment Address 7E
Adjustment Address 80 Specified Value A = 0.82 ± 0.05 V
Specified Value f = 11.85 ± 0.05 MHz (*1)
f = 11.55 ± 0.05 MHz (*2) Connection of Equipment:
Connect the measuring device as shown in the following figure,
*1: IC3901 of MI-041 board is LA9511. and adjust.
*2: IC3901 of MI-041 board is AN2920.
Oscilloscope
Connection of Equipment: IR receiver jig 75Ω
Main unit
and adjust. VIDEO
OUT
Main unit IR receiver jig 75Ω (1-247-804-11)

Pin 5 of Frequency counter
CN003 Fig. 5-3-12.
Adjusting method:
Fig. 5-3-11. 1 0 01 01 Set the data.
Adjusting method: button.
Order Page Address Data Procedure 3 F 7E Change the data, set the video
1 0 01 01 Set the data. signal amplitude (A) to the
2 3 0C 08 Set the data, and press PAUSE specified value.
button. 4 F 7E Press PAUSE button.
3 F 80 Change the data, and set the 5 3 0C 00 Set the data, and press PAUSE
video carrier frequency (f) to the button.
specified value. 6 0 01 00 Set the data.
4 F 80 Press PAUSE button.
White
button.
Fig. 5-3-13.
5-47
3. IR Audio Deviation Adjustment (MI-041 Board)
Mode VTR stop

Signal Video : Color bar, VIDEO IN jack of
DVMC-DA1
Audio : 400Hz, –7.5dBs, AUDIO IN
L and R jack of DVMC-DA1
Measurement Point AUDIO L terminal and AUDIO R
terminal of IR receiver jig
(Terminated at 47kΩ)
Measuring Instrument Audio level meter
Adjustment Page F
Adjustment Address 7F
Specified Value Signal level: –7.5 ± 1.0 dBs
Level difference of L and R: Below
2dB
Connection of Equipment:
and adjust.
Pattern generator Main unit IR receiver jig

VIDEO OUT
(75 Ω)
Media converter
DVMC-DA1
DV
AUDIO IN
IN/OUT AUDIO OUT
R L VIDEO IN
DV L R
IN/OUT
Audio oscillator
Audio Left
Attenuator (White)
Audio level meter
Audio Right
(Red)
600 Ω
600 Ω: 270 Ω (1-249-410-11) + 330 Ω (1-249-411-11)

47k Ω
47k Ω (1-249-437-11)
Fig. 5-3-14.
Adjusting method:
2 Connect the audio level meter to
the AUDIO L terminal of the IR
receiver jig.
3 F 7F Change the data and set the
400Hz audio signal level to the
specified value.
4 F 7F Press PAUSE button.
5 Connect the audio level meter to
the AUDIO R terminal of the IR
receiver jig.
6 F 7F Check that the 400Hz audio
signal level is within the
specified value. If outside, repeat
from step 2.
5-48
3-6. AUDIO SYSTEM ADJUSTMENTS 1. Playback Level Check
Mode Playback
[Connecting the measuring instruments for the audio] Signal Digital8 alignment tape:
Connect the audio system measuring instruments in addition to the For audio operation check
video system measuring instruments as shown in Fig. 5-3-15. (WR5-3ND (NTSC), WR5-3CD (PAL))
Measurement Point AUDIO/VIDEO jack left or right
Playback Measuring Instrument Audio level meter and frequency
Main unit counter
TV monitor
Specified Value 32 kHz mode: 1 kHz, +3.0 ± 2.0dBs
Video (Yellow) 48 kHz mode: 1 kHz, +3.0 ± 2.0dBs
44.1 kHz mode:
Left (White) The 7.35kHz signal level during EMP
Audio level meter OFF is +2.0 ± 2.0dBs.
AUDIO/ 47k Ω or Distortion meter The 7.35kHz signal level during EMP
VIDEO Right ON is –6 ± 2 dB from the signal level
(Red)
during EMP OFF.
47k Ω
47k Ω (1-249-437-11) Checking Method:

1) Check that the playback signal level is the specified value.
Fig. 5-3-15.
5-49
5-4. SERVICE MODE
4-1. ADJUSTMENT REMOTE COMMANDER 2. Precautions Upon Using
The adjustment remote commander is used for changing the the Adjustment Remote Commander
calculation coefficient in signal processing, EVR data, etc. The Mishandling of the adjustment remote commander may erase the
adjustment remote commander performs bi-directional correct adjustment data at times. To prevent this, it is recommended
communication with the unit using the remote commander signal that all adjustment data be noted down before beginning adjustments
line (LANC). The resultant data of this bi-directional communication and new adjustment data after each adjustment.
is written in the non-volatile memory.
1. Using the Adjustment Remote Commander

1) Connect the adjustment remote commander to the CN1011 of
VC-256 board via CPC jig for BX/BK (J-6082-521-A). To
operate the adjustment remote commander, connect the AC
power adaptor (8.4Vdc) to the DC IN jack of CPC jig for BX/
BK, or connect the L series Info-LITHIUM battery to the battery
terminal of CPC jig for BX/BK.
2) Set the HOLD switch of the adjustment remote commander to
“HOLD” (SERVICE position). If it has been properly
connected, the LCD on the adjustment remote commander will
display as shown in Fig. 5-4-1.
Page Data Address
Fig. 5-4-1.
3) Operate the adjustment remote commander as follows.

• Changing the page
The page increases when the EDIT SEARCH+ button is
pressed, and decreases when the EDIT SEARCH– button is
pressed. There are altogether 16 pages, from 0 to F.
Hexadecimal
notation 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B CD E F
LCD Display 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A b c d E F
Decimal notation
conversion value 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 1112 1314 15
• Changing the address

The address increases when the FF (M) button is pressed,
and decreases when the REW (m) button is pressed. There
are altogether 256 addresses, from 00 to FF.
• Changing the data (Data setting)
The data increases when the PLAY (N) button is pressed,
and decreases when the STOP (x) button is pressed. There
are altogether 256 data, from 00 to FF.
• Writing the adjustment data
The PAUSE button must be pressed to write the adjustment
data (C, D, E, F, 7, 8 page) in the nonvolatile memory. (The
new adjusting data will not be recorded in the nonvolatile
memory if this step is not performed.)
4) After completing all adjustments, turn off the main power
supply (8.4 V) once.
5-50
4-2. DATA PROCESS
The calculation of the DDS display and the adjustment remote
commander display data (hexadecimal notation) are required for
obtaining the adjustment data of some adjustment items. In this case,
after converting the hexadecimal notation to decimal notation,
calculate and convert the result to hexadecimal notation, and use it
as the adjustment data. Indicates the hexadecimal-decimal
conversion table.
Hexadecimal-decimal Conversion Table 2

Lower digit of
hexadecimal 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F
Upper digit (A) (b) (c) (d) (E) ( F)
of hexadecimal
0 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
1 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31
2 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47
3 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63
4 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 77 76 77 78 79
5 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95
6 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111
7 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 127
8 128 129 130 131 132 133 134 135 136 137 138 139 140 141 142 143
9 144 145 146 147 148 149 150 151 152 153 154 155 156 157 158 159
A ( A) 160 161 162 163 164 165 166 167 168 169 170 171 172 173 174 175
1 B (b) 176 177 178 179 180 181 182 183 184 185 186 187 188 189 190 191
C (c) 192 193 194 195 196 197 198 199 200 201 202 203 204 205 206 207
D (d) 208 209 210 211 212 213 214 215 216 217 218 219 220 221 222 223
E (E) 224 225 226 227 228 229 230 231 232 233 234 235 236 237 238 239
F ( F) 240 241 242 243 244 245 246 247 248 249 250 251 252 253 254 255
Note: The characters shown in the parenthesis ( ) shown the display on the adjustment remote commander.
(Example) If the DDS display or the adjustment remote commander shows BD (bd);
Because the upper digit of the adjustment number is B (b), and the lower digit is D (d), the meeting point
“189” of 1 and 2 in the above table is the corresponding decimal number.
Table. 5-4-1.
5-51
4-3. SERVICE MODE 2. Emergence Memory Address
Additional note on adjustment 2-1. C Page Emergence Memory Address

Note: After the completion of the all adjustments, cancel the service mode Page C Address F4 to FF
by either of the following ways.
1) After data on page: D is restored, unplug the main power supply
and remove the coin lithium battery. ( In this case, date and time Address Contents
and menu setting have been set by users are canceled. Perform F4 EMG code when first error occurs
resetting.)
2) After data on page: D is restored, select page: 0, address: 01, and F6 Upper: MSW code when shift starts when first error
return the data to 00. And when data on page:2 and 3 are changed, occurs
return data to the original condition. Lower: MSW code when first error occurs
F7 Lower: MSW code to be moved when first error
1. Setting the Test Mode occurs
F8 EMG code when second error occurs
Page D Address 10 FA Upper: MSW code when shift starts when second
error occurs
Data Function Lower: MSW code when second error occurs
00 Normal FB Lower: MSW code to be moved when second error
01 Forced camera power ON occurs
02 Forced VTR power ON FC EMG code when last error occurs
FE Upper: MSW code when shift starts when last error
• Before setting the data , select page: 0, address: 01, and set data: occurs
01. Lower: MSW code when last error occurs
• For page D, the data set will be recorded in the non-volatile FF Lower: MSW code to be moved when last error
memory by pressing the PAUSE button of the adjustment remote occurs
commander. In this case, take note that the test mode will not be
exited even when the main power is turned off (8.4Vdc). When no error occurs in this unit, data “00” is written in the above
• After completing adjustments/repairs, be sure to return the data addresses (F4 to FF). when first error occurs in the unit, the data
of page: D address: 10 to 00, and press the PAUSE button of the corresponding to the error is written in the first emergency address
adjustment remote commander. And select page: 0, address: 01, (F4 to F7). In the same way, when the second error occurs, the data
and set data: 00. corresponding to the error is written in the second emergency address
(F8 to FB).
Finally, when the last error occurs, the data corresponding to the
error is written in the last emergency address (FC to FF).
Note : After completing adjustments, be sure to initialize the data of
addresses F4 to FF to “00”.
Initializing method:
2) Select page: 3, address: 01, set data: 37, and press the PAUSE
button.
5-52
2-2. EMG Code (Emergency Code)
Codes corresponding to the errors which occur are written in C
page, addresses F4, F8 and FC (or F page, addresses 10, 14 and 18).
The type of error indicated by the code are shown in the following
table.
Code Emergency Type
00 No error
10 Loading motor emergency during loading
11 Loading motor emergency during unloading
22 T reel emergency during normal rotation
23 S reel emergency during normal rotation
T reel emergency (Short circuit between S reel
24
terminal and T reel terminal)
30 FG emergency at the start up of the capstan
40 FG emergency at the start up of the drum
42 FG emergency during normal rotation of the drum
5-53
2-3. MSW Code
• The lower parts of the data of C page, addresses F6, FA and FE
represent the MSW codes (mode switch mechanism position)
when errors occurs.
• The upper parts of the data of C page, addresses F6, FA and FE
represent, when the mechanism position is to be moved, the MSW
codes at the start movement (when moving the loading motor).
• The lower parts of the data of C page, addresses F7, FB and FF
represent the MSW codes of the desired movement when the
mechanism position is to be moved.
← Unloading Loading →
Mechanism position EJECT BL USE BL LOAD BL STOP BL TURN BL REC/PB BL REW
0 1 1 1 = 7
0 1 1 1 = 7
0 1 1 1 = 7
0 1 0 0 = 4
0 1 1 1 = 7
0 0 0 0 = 0
0 1 1 1 = 7
0 0 1 0 = 2
0 0 0 1 = 1
0 1 1 1 = 7
0 0 1 1 = 3
MSB
0 1 0 1 = 5
0 1 1 0 = 6
MODE SW C
MODE SW B
MODE SW A
LS chassis movement range

Pinch roller is detached
Releasing lock of Pinch roller is pressed

cassette campartment
Mechanism Position MSW Code Contents

Position at which the cassette compartment lock is released. The mechanism will not move any
EJECT 1 further in the unloading direction.
BLANC code. Between two codes. The mechanism will not be stopped by this code while it is
BL 7 operating.
EJECT completion position. When the cassette is ejected, the mechanism will stop at this
USE 3 position.
LOAD 2 Code during loading/unloading. Code that is used while the LS chassis is moving.
Normal stop position. The pinch roller separates, the tension regulator returns, and the brakes of
STOP 6 both reels turn on.
TURN 4 Position at which is used when the pendulum gear swings from S to T or from T to S.
PB, REC, CUE, REV, PAUSE, FF positions.
REC/PB 0 The pinch roller is pressed and tension regulator is on.
REW position. REW are carried at this position.
REW 5 The mechanism will not move any further in the loading direction.
5-54
3. Bit Value Discrimination
Bit values must be discriminated using the display data of the Display on the Bit values
adjustment remote commander for the following items. Us the table adjustment bit3 bit2 bit1 bit0
below to discriminate if the bit value is “1” or “0”. remote or or or or
Display on the adjustment remote commander commander bit7 bit6 bit5 bit4
0 0 0 0 0
1 0 0 0 1
2 0 0 1 0
3 0 0 1 1
4 0 1 0 0
Address 5 0 1 0 1
Page bit3 to bit0 discrimination 6 0 1 1 0
bit7 to bit4 discrimination 7 0 1 1 1
A 8 1 0 0 0
(Example) If the remote commander display is “8E”, bit value from bit 9 1 0 0 1
7 to bit 4 can be discriminated from the column A, and A (A) 1 0 1 0
those from bit 3 to bit 0 from column B.
B (b) 1 0 1 1
C (C) 1 1 0 0
D (d) 1 1 0 1
B E (E) 1 1 1 0
F (F ) 1 1 1 1
4. Switch check (1)

Page 2 Address 43
Bit Function When bit value = 1 When bit value = 0

0 POWER SW (VTR MODE SW)(SS-1000 block) OFF ON (VCR or PLAYER)
1 POWER SW (CAM MODE SW)(SS-1000 block) OFF ON (CAMERA)
2 START/STOP SW (SS-1000 block) OFF ON
3 EJECT SW (FK-1000 block) OFF ON
4 CC DOWN SW (Mechanism chassis) OFF (UP) ON (DOWN)
5 PHOTO SW (PHOTO FREEZE SW)(FK-1000 block) OFF ON
6
7
Using method:
1) Select page: 2, address: 43.
2) By discriminating the bit value of display data, the state of the switch can be discriminated.
5. Switch check (2)

Page 2 Address 49

6 A/V OUT jack (FP-258 flexible) Used Not used
7 S VIDEO jack (FP-258 flexible) Not used Used
Using method:
1) Select page: 2, address: 49.
6. Switch check (3)

Page 3 Address 5A

6 HEADPHONE jack (CF-1000 block) Used Not used
Using method:
1) Select page: 3, address: 5A.
5-55
7. Switch check (4)
Page 2 Address 60 to 65
Using method:
1) Select page: 2, address: 60 to 65.
2) By discriminating the display data, the pressed key can be discriminated.
Data
Address
00 to 0C 0D to 24 25 to 3F 40 to 5D 5E to 81 82 to AA AB to D7 D8 to FF
60 SUPER LIGHT STOP FF REC
(KEY AD0) LASER LINK (FK-1000) (FK-1000) (FK-1000) (FK-1000) No key input
(IC4803 od) (FK-1000)(S012)*1 (S002) (S005) (S007) (S010,011)*2
61 PHOTO PAUSE REW PLAY
(KEY AD1) (PHOTO START) (FK-1000) (FK-1000) (FK-1000) No key input
(IC4803 of) (FK-1000)(S004) (S006) (S008) (S009)
62 MENU EXPOSURE MENU VOLUME + VOLUME – BACKLIGHT
(KEY AD2) (CF-1000) (CF-1000) EXECUTE (CF-1000) (CF-1000) (CF-1000) No key input
(IC4803 og) (S002) (S004) (CF-1000)(S007) (S013) (S016) (S018)
63
PANEL CLOSE PANEL OPEN
(KEY AD3)
(S901) (S901)
(IC4803 oh)
64 TIME SUPER END SEARCH DISPLAY FADER FOCUS
(KEY AD4) (CF-1000) NIGHT SHOT (CF-1000) (CF-1000) (CF-1000) (CF-1000) No key input
(IC4803 oj) (S003) (CF-1000)(S006) (S009) (S012) (S022) (S019)
65 PANEL PANEL
(KEY AD5) REVERSE NORMAL
(IC4803 ok) (PR-10000) (PR-10000)
*1: DCR-TRV130 (NTSC) model only
*2: Except AEP/UK model
8. Record of Use check

Note: When replacing the drum assembly, initialize the data of address: A2 to A4.
When replacing the video light, initialize the data of address: E0 to E2.
When replacing the EL-Back light, initialize the data of address: E3 to E5.
Page 2 Address A2 to AA, E0 to E5
Bit Function Remarks

A2 Drum rotation Minutes
A3 counted time Hour (L) 10th place digit and 1st place digit of counted time (decimal digit)
A4 (BCD code) Hour (H) 1000th place digit and 100th place digit of counted time (decimal digit)
A5 User initial power Year
A6 on date Month After setting the clock, set the date of power on next
A7 (BCD code) Day
A8 Final condensation Year
A9 occurrence date Month
AA (BCD code) Day
E0 Video light Hour (H) 1000th place digit and 100th place digit of counted time (decimal digit)
E1 counted time Hour (L) 10th place digit and 1st place digit of counted time (decimal digit)
E2 (BCD code) Minutes
E3 EL-Back light Hour (H) 1000th place digit and 100th place digit of counted time (decimal digit)
E4 counted time Hour (L) 10th place digit and 1st place digit of counted time (decimal digit)
E5 (BCD code) Minutes
Using method:
1) The record of use data is displayed at page: 2, addresses: A2 to AA and E0 to E5.
Note: This data will be erased (reset) when the cabinet (R) assembly (VC-256 board CN1007 (24P)) is removed.
Initializing method:
1) Using the adjustment remote commander, select the object address and set data: 00.
5-56
9. Record of Self-diagnosis check
Page 2 Address B0 to C6
Address Self-diagnosis code

B0 “Repaired by” code (Occurred 1st time) *1
B1 “Block function” code (Occurred 1st time)
B2 “Detailed” code (Occurred 1st time)
B4 “Repaired by” code (Occurred 2nd time) *1
B5 “Block function” code (Occurred 2nd time)
B6 “Detailed” code (Occurred 2nd time)
B8 “Repaired by” code (Occurred 3rd time) *1
B9 “Block function” code (Occurred 3rd time)
BA “Detailed” code (Occurred 3rd time)
BC “Repaired by” code (Occurred 4th time) *1
BD “Block function” code (Occurred 4th time)
BE “Detailed” code (Occurred 4th time)
C0 “Repaired by” code (Occurred 5th time) *1
C1 “Block function” code (Occurred 5th time)
C2 “Detailed” code (Occurred 5th time)
C4 “Repaired by” code (Occurred the last time) *1
C5 “Block function” code (Occurred the last time)
C6 “Detailed” code (Occurred the last time)
*1 : “01” t “C”, “03” t “E”
Using method:
1) The past self-diagnosis codes are displayed at page: 2, addresses: BC to C6. Refer to “SELF-DIAGNOSIS FUNCTION” for detail of the
self-diagnosis code.
Note: This data will be erased (reset) when the cabinet (R) assembly (VC-256 board CN1007 (24P)) is removed.
5-57E
DCR-TRV130/TRV130E
SECTION 6
REPAIR PARTS LIST
6-1. EXPLODED VIEWS

NOTE:
• -XX, -X mean standardized parts, so they may • Abbreviation The components identified by mark 0 or
have some differences from the original one. CND : Canadian model dotted line with mark 0 are critical for safety.
• Items marked “*” are not stocked since they HK : Hong Kong model Replace only with part number specified.
are seldom required for routine service. Some AUS : Australian model Les composants identifiés par une marque
delay should be anticipated when ordering these JE : Tourist model 0 sont critiques pour la sécurité.
items. CN : Chinese model Ne les remplacer que par une pièce portant
• The mechanical parts with no reference number KR : Korea model le numéro spécifié.
in the exploded views are not supplied. BR : Brazilian model
6-1-1. OVERALL SECTION
6 B
6 Cabinet (L) section
B (See page 6-2)
11
14 6 Cabinet (R) section
(See page 6-5)
13
6
1 C
not
A A supplied
10
9 12 16
1
not supplied
15 1
6 6
8 6
C 1 17
MI
-04
1
LAMP, HALOGEN MIC901

XB-3D (HL6V/3W)
3 2
not 5
supplied 19 MIC902 18
7
4
Ref. No. Part No. Description Remarks Ref. No. Part No. Description Remarks
1 3-948-339-61 TAPPING 11 3-052-815-01 BELT (ES), GRIP
2 3-065-468-01 RETAINER (REAR), MICROPHONE * 12 3-065-455-01 STOPPER (FRONT) (10), BELT
3 3-065-467-01 RETAINER (FRONT), MICROPHONE * 13 3-065-457-01 PLATE REAR (10), L GROUND
* 4 3-065-470-01 CUSHION (10), MICROPHONE 14 3-058-622-01 STOPPER (REAR), BELT
5 X-3951-212-1 PANEL (10) ASSY, F (TRV130) 15 A-7074-709-A MI-041 (S) BOARD, COMPLETE (TRV130E)
5 X-3951-220-1 PANEL (10) ASSY, F (TRV130E) 15 A-7074-711-A MI-041 (SI) BOARD, COMPLETE (TRV130)
6 3-067-347-01 MI SCREW M2 (H) 16 3-987-717-01 SCREW, TRIPOD
7 1-518-723-21 LIGHT, VIDEO 17 1-475-141-61 REMOTE COMMANDER (RMT-814)
8 X-3949-376-1 CAP (N) ASSY, LENS 18 3-742-854-01 LID, BATTERY CASE (FOR RMT-814)
9 3-065-433-01 COVER (10), JACK 19 3-065-464-01 WINDOW (12), LCD
10 X-3951-192-1 CABINET L (10) ASSY MIC901 1-542-452-11 MICROPHONE (Rch)

(TRV130/TRV130E:E,HK,AUS,CN) MIC902 1-542-452-11 MICROPHONE (Lch)
10 X-3951-194-1 CABINET L (10) ASSY (TRV130E:AEP,UK)
6-1
Ver 1.1 2001. 05
6-1-2. CABINET (L) SECTION
62
not supplied 58
58
68 G
58 I
59 63 58
53
64
BT901
57
61 60
J
A not
B supplied
D C
E 56 EVF section
Mechanism deck
(See page 6-7 to 6-10) 71 54 H (See page 6-3)
I
G
65 J
56 F
53 -2
66
VCard
66 53 B o
H 70 K
F
A
E DC
B 53
67
51 69
52
55
53 53
Lens section
(See page 6-4)
51 1-680-203-11 FP-263 FLEXIBLE BOARD 62 1-476-423-21 SWITCH BLOCK, CONTROL (SS-1000)
* 52 3-065-428-01 FRAME B (10), MD (TRV130/TRV130E:E,HK,AUS,CN)
53 3-968-729-51 SCREW (M2), LOCK ACE, P2 63 X-3951-196-1 PANEL (12) ASSY, BATTERY
54 1-680-199-11 FP-258 FLEXIBLE BOARD (TRV130:US,CND,E,HK,KR/TRV130E)
* 55 3-065-429-01 FRAME (10), LENS 63 X-3951-471-1 PANEL (B) (12) ASSY, BATTERY (TRV130:BR)
64 3-987-656-01 LID, JACK
56 4-974-725-01 SCREW (M1.7X2.5), P 65 A-7096-408-A VC-256 (IB-S) BOARD, COMPLETE (SERVICE)
57 X-3951-227-1 LID (12) ASSY, CASSETTE
58 3-067-347-01 MI SCREW M2 (H) 66 3-948-339-61 TAPPING
59 1-476-424-41 SWITCH BLOCK, CONTROL (FK-1000) 67 1-680-200-11 FP-259 FLEXIBLE BOARD
(TRV130E:AEP,UK) 68 3-065-662-01 LABEL, LS CAUTION
59 1-476-424-61 SWITCH BLOCK, CONTROL (FK-1000)(TRV130) 69 3-941-343-21 TAPE (A)
70 3-067-254-01 SHEET (10), ABSORBING
59 1-476-424-71 SWITCH BLOCK, CONTROL (FK-1000)
(TRV130E:E,HK,AUS,CN) 71 3-066-949-01 CUSHION (12), JACK
60 3-065-421-01 SHEET METAL (LOWER)(12), STRAP BT901 1-694-384-11 TERMINAL BOARD, BATTERY
61 3-066-169-01 SHEET, MD
62 1-476-423-11 SWITCH BLOCK, CONTROL (SS-1000)
(TRV130E:AEP,UK)
6-2
6-1-3. EVF SECTION
not 114
supplied
111
V901
112
113
103
109
107
108 110
103
106
105
102 104
103
101
101 3-061-794-01 SCREW, LOOSE STOPPER 108 A-7073-855-A VF-129 (P) BOARD, COMPLETE (TRV130E)
102 3-065-481-01 BASE B (12), VF 109 X-3951-202-1 CABINET UPPER B (12) ASSY, EVF
103 3-948-339-81 TAPPING 110 3-975-898-01 SCREW (T), F LOCK
104 X-3950-230-1 HINGE ASSY, VF 111 X-3949-329-1 FINDER (S) ASSY
105 3-065-480-01 CABINET LOWER B (12), EVF 112 3-941-343-21 TAPE (A)
106 3-053-681-01 TALLY, EVF 113 3-709-272-01 COVER, HIGH VOLTAGE (SERVICE)
107 1-792-454-11 CABLE, FLEXIBLE FLAT (FFC-289) 114 3-709-273-01 MASK, CRT (SERVICE)
108 A-7073-838-A VF-129 (N) BOARD, COMPLETE (TRV130) 0 V901 1-452-673-61 CRT ASSY (M01KXX90WB)
Note : Note :
6-3
6-1-4. LENS SECTION
163
161
160
162 159
IC191
153
158 155
M906
156
157
154
152
155
not
supplied
154
M905 152
153
151
Be sure to read “Precautions upon replacing CCD imager”

on page 4-8 when changing the CCD imager.
151 8-848-729-01 DEVICE, LENS LSV-630A 160 1-758-216-21 FILTER BLOCK, OPTICAL
152 X-3949-355-2 IRIS FLEXIBLE ASSY 630 161 3-953-817-01 RUBBER (F), SEAL (TRV130E)
153 3-713-791-41 SCREW, TAPPING (M1.7X5), P2 161 3-968-054-11 RUBBER (FM), SHIELD (TRV130)
154 3-713-791-51 SCREW, TAPPING (M1.7X3.5), P2 162 A-7074-712-A CD-281 (X) BOARD,COMPLETE
155 3-056-022-01 TAPPING (B1.7X3.5), HEAD 163 3-318-203-11 SCREW (B1.7X6), TAPPING
156 3-053-827-01 LEVER, IR IC191 A-7030-821-A CCD BLOCK ASSY (CCD IMAGER)(TRV130)
157 3-053-800-01 SPRING, RETAIN IC191 A-7031-206-A CCD BLOCK ASSY (CCD IMAGER)(TRV130E)
158 3-053-799-01 GEAR, IR M905 1-763-262-11 MOTOR, STEPPING F630 (FOCUS)
159 3-978-981-11 ADAPTOR (FK), CCD FITTING M906 1-763-046-21 MOTOR, STEPPING Z600 (ZOOM)
6-4
6-1-5. CABINET (R) SECTION
LCD section
(See page 6-6)
204 205 A
209
203
201
201 202
C A
B 207
B 201
C
208
LCD902
S901
201 206 D901
201
: BT001 (Lithium battary) CF-1000 on the mount position. (See page 4-27)
The printed wiring board of the Control switch block (CF-1000) on which lithium battery is mounted, is not shown.]
201 3-948-339-61 TAPPING 207 1-680-201-11 FP-260 FLEXIBLE BOARD
202 3-065-436-01 BLIND (12), HINGE 208 1-757-397-21 CABLE, FLEXIBLE FLAT (FFC-295)
203 1-476-425-21 SWITCH BLOCK, CONTROL (CF-1000) 209 3-941-343-21 TAPE (A)
204 X-3951-223-1 CABINET R (12) ASSY 0 D901 1-518-724-11 ELEMENT, ELECTRO LUMINOUS
205 3-059-539-11 LID (103P), CPC LCD902 1-804-272-11 DISPLAY PANEL, LIQUID CRYSTAL
206 3-065-451-01 HOLDER (12), LCD S901 1-771-848-11 SWITCH, PUSH
Note : Note :
6-5
6-1-6. LCD SECTION
265
259 260
C
258
257 264 B
A
256
255 LCD901
PD B ND901
-
Bo131
ar
d
263
254 253 C 261
262
A
252
266
251
251 3-067-347-01 MI SCREW M2 (H) 261 A-7074-713-A PD-131 (XC-2.5) BOARD, COMPLETE
252 3-065-474-01 CABINET C (12), P 262 3-968-729-51 SCREW (M2), LOCK ACE, P2
* 253 3-058-672-01 CLAMP, HARNESS 263 3-065-475-01 FRAME (12), PANEL
254 3-948-339-31 SCREW, TAPPING 264 X-3951-199-1 CABINET M (12) ASSY, P
255 3-065-477-01 COVER C (12), HINGE 265 3-948-339-81 TAPPING
256 X-3951-206-1 HINGE (12) ASSY 266 3-065-529-01 PLATE (12), PANEL ORNAMENT (TRV130)
257 1-960-975-11 HARNESS (PD-110) 266 3-065-529-11 PLATE (12), PANEL ORNAMENT (TRV130E)
258 3-065-478-01 COVER M (12), HINGE LCD901 1-803-859-21 INDICATOR MODULE LIQUID CRYST (SERVICE)
259 4-974-725-01 SCREW (M1.7X2.5), P 0 ND901 1-517-752-41 TUBE, FLUORESCENT, COLD CATHODE
260 1-418-802-11 SWITCH BLOCK, CONTROL (PR-10000)
Note : Note :
6-6
6-1-7. CASSETTE COMPARTMENT ASSY, DRUM ASSY
701
702
701
703
705
704
706 707
LS chassis block 708

M901 assembly
(See page 6-8)
709
Mechanical chassis block

assembly
(See page 6-9 to 6-10)
710
701 3-065-932-01 PAN (2 MAIN M1.4X1.6), CAMERA 707 3-065-840-01 CUT (0.98X3X0.13), LUMILER (W)
702 3-065-895-01 LEVER, REEL RELEASE 708 3-065-935-01 HLC CUT 1.8X4X0.5
703 3-065-896-01 PLATE, BLIND 709 3-947-503-01 SCREW (M1.4)
704 X-3951-298-1 CASSETTE COMPARTMENT ASSY 710 X-3951-299-1 SCREW ASSY, DRUM FITTING
705 X-3951-302-1 DAMPER ASSY M901 A-7048-951-A DRUM (DKH-04A-R)(SERVICE)
706 X-3951-297-1 GEAR ASSY, R DRIVE
6-7
6-1-8. LS CHASSIS BLOCK ASSEMBLY
767
759 S001
760 764
757 758 766

768
763 765 769
762 761 770

756 771
755 772
781
775 778 780
S002 752
Q001 not supplied 776
H001
774 779
D001
LS-057 H002
not supplied 773
Q002 777
FP-301
not supplied
FP-302
FP-300 not supplied
not supplied
not
supplied
754
753
752
783
751
782
751 3-065-822-01 RAIL (S), GUIDE 771 3-065-830-01 SPRING, S RATCHET
752 3-947-503-01 SCREW (M1.4) 772 X-3951-288-1 TABLE (T) ASSY, REEL
753 A-7096-416-A BASE (S) BLOCK ASSY, GUIDE 773 3-065-819-01 SPRING, TG1 ARM
754 A-7096-415-A BASE (T) BLOCK ASSY, GUIDE 774 3-065-821-01 RAIL (T), GUIDE
755 A-7096-426-A CHASSIS ASSY, LS 775 X-3951-289-1 TABLE (S) ASSY, REEL
756 3-065-802-01 SPRING, TG7 ARM 776 3-065-833-01 GUIDE, LOCK

757 A-7096-414-A ARM BLOCK ASSY, TRG7 777 3-065-831-01 PLATE (SPR), RE RETURN
758 3-065-801-01 RETAINER, TG7 778 X-3951-304-1 ARM ASSY, TG1
759 3-065-932-01 PAN (2 MAIN M1.4X1.6), CAMERA 779 3-065-835-01 GUIDE (S), CASSETTE
760 X-3951-303-1 ARM ASSY, PINCH 780 3-065-820-01 SPRING, RVS ARM
761 3-065-823-01 ARM, T RATCHET 781 X-3951-296-1 BAND ASSY, BT

762 3-065-794-01 ROAD (SPR), PINCH ARM 782 3-065-836-01 COVER, LS GREASE
763 3-065-792-01 ROLLER, P LIM ARM 783 3-067-167-01 SCREW (M1.4X2), CAMERA TAPPING
764 3-065-834-01 GUIDE (T), CASSETTE S001 1-692-614-11 SWITCH, PUSH (3KEY) (REC PROOF)
765 3-065-824-01 SPRING, T RATCHET H001 8-719-033-37 ELEMENT, HALL HW-105C (T REEL)
766 A-7096-417-A SOFT ASSY, T H002 8-719-033-37 ELEMENT, HALL HW-105C (S REEL)
767 7-627-852-38 SCREW, PRECISION +P1.7X1.8 TYPE3 D001 8-719-988-42 DIODE GL453 (TAPE LED)
768 3-065-832-01 PLATE, LS CAM Q001 8-729-907-25 PHOTO TRANSISTOR PT4850F (TAPE TOP)
769 3-065-828-01 ARM, S RATCHET Q002 8-729-907-25 PHOTO TRANSISTOR PT4850F (TAPE END)
770 3-065-829-01 PLATE, S RATCHET (RE)
6-8
6-1-9. MECHANICAL CHASSIS BLOCK ASSEMBLY-1
811 816 815

819
805
824 not
supplied
815 805 817

810
809 814
802
807 813
M902
812 802
815
821 M903
820
822
806
823
802
808
818
804
803
Mechanical chassis
block assembly-2
(See page 6-10)
801
801 A-7096-422-A BASE ASSY, DRUM 814 3-065-881-01 SPRING, P PRESSURE PLATE
802 3-947-503-01 SCREW (M1.4) 815 3-065-934-01 HLW CUT 0.98X3X0.25
803 3-065-928-01 SPACER, GROUND 816 1-786-096-11 SWITCH, ROTALY
804 3-065-927-01 GROUND, DRUM 817 3-065-898-01 SPRING, EJECT ARM
805 3-065-932-01 PAN (2 MAIN M1.4X1.6), CAMERA 818 3-065-870-01 ROLLER, LS GUIDE
806 3-067-154-01 SPRING, CAPSTAN 819 A-7096-421-A ARM ASSY, HCL

807 3-065-931-01 RAIL (T2), GUIDE 820 3-065-918-01 GEAR (2), CAM RELAY
808 X-3947-398-1 SCREW ASSY, M1.7 PW 821 A-7096-419-A GEAR ASSY, CHANGE
809 3-065-933-01 PAN (2 MAIN 1.4X4.5), CAMERA 822 3-065-902-01 BELT, TIMING
810 1-677-049-11 FP-228 FLEXIBLE BOARD (DEW SENSOR) 823 3-065-905-01 GEAR, RELAY
811 1-680-434-11 FP-299 FLEXIBLE BOARD 824 3-065-882-01 ARM, EJECT

812 3-065-877-01 PLATE (T), GUIDE LOCK M902 8-835-701-01 MOTOR, DC SCE13A/C-NP (CAPSTAN)
813 X-3951-301-1 PLATE ASSY, PINCH PRESSURE M903 A-7096-420-A MOTOR ASSY, LD (LOADING)
6-9
6-1-10. MECHANICAL CHASSIS BLOCK ASSEMBLY-2
860
863
861
859
862
857
864
858
865
856
853 855
866
854
852
851
867
868
851 3-065-920-01 ARM, HC DRIVE 860 7-624-101-04 STOP RING 1.2 (E TYPE)
852 3-065-913-01 GEAR (4), LD 861 A-7096-412-A GEAR (T) ASSY, GUIDE
853 3-065-914-01 SHEET, COVER 862 X-3951-307-1 PLATE ASSY, M SLIDE
854 3-065-917-01 GEAR (1), CAM RELAY 863 X-3951-305-1 ARM ASSY, LS
855 3-065-934-01 HLW CUT 0.98X3X0.25 864 3-065-901-01 ROLLER, LS ARM
856 3-065-915-01 GEAR (1), CAM 865 3-065-916-01 GEAR (2), CAM
857 3-065-878-01 PLATE (S), GUIDE LOCK 866 3-065-919-01 ARM, T1 LIMITTER
858 3-065-932-01 PAN (2 MAIN M1.4X1.6), CAMERA 867 X-3951-308-1 ARM ASSY, GL
859 A-7096-413-A GEAR (S) ASSY, GUIDE 868 X-3951-300-1 CHASSIS ASSY, MECHANICAL
6-10
CD-281 MI-041
6-2. ELECTRICAL PARTS LIST

NOTE:
• Due to standardization, replacements in the • COILS When indicating parts by reference number,
parts list may be different from the parts uH: µH please include the board name.
specified in the diagrams or the components • SEMICONDUCTORS
used on the set. In each case, u: µ, for example: The components identified by mark 0 or
• -XX, -X mean standardized parts, so they may uA...: µA... , uPA... , µPA... , dotted line with mark 0 are critical for safety.
Replace only with part number specified.
have some difference from the original one. uPB... , µPB... , uPC... , µPC... ,
• Items marked “*” are not stocked since they uPD..., µPD... Les composants identifiés par une marque
0 sont critiques pour la sécurité.
are seldom required for routine service. Some • Abbreviation
Ne les remplacer que par une pièce portant
delay should be anticipated when ordering these CND : Canadian model le numéro spécifié.
items. HK : Hong Kong model
• CAPACITORS: AUS : Australian model
uF: µF JE : Tourist model
• RESISTORS CN : Chinese model
All resistors are in ohms. KR : Korea model
METAL: metal-film resistor BR : Brazilian model
METAL OXIDE: Metal Oxide-film resistor
F: nonflammable
A-7074-712-A CD-281 BOARD, COMPLETE C764 1-164-943-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.01uF 10% 16V
********************** C768 1-164-343-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.056uF 10% 25V
(Ref.No.;1000Series) C769 1-110-563-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.068uF 10% 16V
(IC191 is not included in this complete board.) C770 1-165-176-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.047uF 10% 16V
C772 1-164-343-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.056uF 10% 25V
< CAPACITOR >
C191 1-126-395-11 ELECT 22uF 20% 16V C774 1-164-343-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.056uF 10% 25V
C195 1-164-156-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 25V C775 1-110-666-11 ELECT CHIP 22uF 20% 6.3V
C196 1-128-994-21 ELECT CHIP 47uF 20% 10V C776 1-107-826-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10% 16V
C197 1-125-777-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10% 10V C777 1-164-343-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.056uF 10% 25V
< CONNECTOR > C779 1-162-970-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.01uF 10% 25V
CN191 1-766-344-21 CONNECTOR, FFC/FPC 14P C781 1-164-245-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.015uF 10% 25V
< IC > C783 1-164-227-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.022uF 10% 25V
IC191 A-7030-821-A CCD BLOCK ASSY (CCD IMAGER)(TRV130) C784 1-110-666-11 ELECT CHIP 22uF 20% 6.3V
IC191 A-7031-209-A CCD BLOCK ASSY (CCD IMAGER)(TRV130E) C785 1-164-227-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.022uF 10% 25V
< COIL > C788 1-164-227-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.022uF 10% 25V
L191 1-469-528-91 INDUCTOR 100uH
< TRANSISTOR > C794 1-110-446-11 ELECT CHIP 10uF 20% 6.3V
Q191 8-729-117-73 TRANSISTOR 2SC4178-F13F14-T1 C800 1-110-446-11 ELECT CHIP 10uF 20% 6.3V
C808 1-110-446-11 ELECT CHIP 10uF 20% 6.3V
< RESISTOR >
C809 1-126-205-11 ELECT CHIP 47uF 20% 6.3V
R191 1-216-864-91 SHORT 0 C3901 1-125-837-91 CERAMIC CHIP 1uF 10% 6.3V
R192 1-216-864-91 SHORT 0 (TRV130)
R193 1-216-827-11 METAL CHIP 3.3K 5% 1/16W C3904 1-164-943-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.01uF 10% 16V
R194 1-216-864-91 SHORT 0 (TRV130)
R198 1-216-864-91 SHORT 0 C3905 1-117-863-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.47uF 10% 6.3V
************************************************************ (TRV130)
C3906 1-117-863-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.47uF 10% 6.3V
A-7074-709-A MI-041 BOARD, COMPLETE (TRV130E) (TRV130)
*******************************
A-7074-711-A MI-041 BOARD, COMPLETE (TRV130) C3907 1-125-837-91 CERAMIC CHIP 1uF 10% 6.3V
****************************** (TRV130)
(Ref.No.;20000Series) C3908 1-125-837-91 CERAMIC CHIP 1uF 10% 6.3V
(TRV130)
< CAPACITOR > C3909 1-164-943-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.01uF 10% 16V
(TRV130)
C758 1-124-778-00 ELECT CHIP 22uF 20% 6.3V C3910 1-135-210-11 TANTAL. CHIP 4.7uF 20% 10V
C759 1-125-777-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10% 10V (TRV130)
C761 1-164-943-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.01uF 10% 16V C3911 1-164-943-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.01uF 10% 16V
C762 1-124-778-00 ELECT CHIP 22uF 20% 6.3V (TRV130)
Be sure to read “Precautions upon replacing CCD imager”
on page 4-8 when changing the CCD imager.
6-11
MI-041
C3912 1-110-446-11 ELECT CHIP 10uF 20% 6.3V < COIL >
(TRV130)
C3913 1-164-668-11 CERAMIC CHIP 510PF 5% 50V L751 1-469-525-91 INDUCTOR 10uH
(TRV130) L3902 1-469-525-91 INDUCTOR 10uH (TRV130)
C3914 1-164-943-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.01uF 10% 16V L3903 1-412-948-11 INDUCTOR 5.6uH (TRV130)
(TRV130) L3904 1-412-957-11 INDUCTOR 33uH (TRV130)
C3915 1-164-943-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.01uF 10% 16V L3905 1-412-957-11 INDUCTOR 33uH (TRV130)
(TRV130)
C3916 1-125-837-91 CERAMIC CHIP 1uF 10% 6.3V L3906 1-469-525-91 INDUCTOR 10uH (TRV130)
(TRV130)
< TRANSISTOR >
(TRV130) Q3901 8-729-037-53 TRANSISTOR 2SA1832F-Y/GR(TPL3)
C3918 1-162-913-11 CERAMIC CHIP 8PF 0.50PF 50V (TRV130)
(TRV130) Q3902 8-729-026-48 TRANSISTOR 2SA1037AK-T146-Q
C3919 1-117-863-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.47uF 10% 6.3V (TRV130)
(TRV130) Q3903 8-729-920-85 TRANSISTOR 2SD1664-T100-QR (TRV130)
C3920 1-117-863-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.47uF 10% 6.3V Q3904 8-729-037-52 TRANSISTOR 2SC4738F-Y/GR(TPL3)
(TRV130) (TRV130E)
C3921 1-162-921-11 CERAMIC CHIP 33PF 5% 50V
(TRV130) < RESISTOR >
C3922 1-125-837-91 CERAMIC CHIP 1uF 10% 6.3V R757 1-216-825-11 METAL CHIP 2.2K 5% 1/16W
(TRV130) R761 1-216-825-11 METAL CHIP 2.2K 5% 1/16W
C3923 1-162-922-11 CERAMIC CHIP 39PF 5% 50V R764 1-216-830-11 METAL CHIP 5.6K 5% 1/16W
C3924 1-125-837-91 CERAMIC CHIP 1uF 10% 6.3V R766 1-216-830-11 METAL CHIP 5.6K 5% 1/16W
(TRV130)
C3925 1-125-777-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10% 10V R767 1-216-830-11 METAL CHIP 5.6K 5% 1/16W
(TRV130) R770 1-216-836-11 METAL CHIP 18K 5% 1/16W
R771 1-216-864-91 SHORT 0
C3929 1-104-847-11 TANTAL. CHIP 22uF 20% 4V
C3930 1-164-943-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.01uF 10% 16V R774 1-216-836-11 METAL CHIP 18K 5% 1/16W
C3931 1-164-943-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.01uF 10% 16V R776 1-216-864-91 SHORT 0
(TRV130) R779 1-216-857-11 METAL CHIP 1M 5% 1/16W
C3932 1-110-453-11 ELECT CHIP 4.7uF 20% 16V
R782 1-216-833-11 METAL CHIP 10K 5% 1/16W
C3934 1-125-777-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10% 10V R783 1-216-857-11 METAL CHIP 1M 5% 1/16W
(TRV130) R785 1-216-835-11 METAL CHIP 15K 5% 1/16W
C3935 1-164-943-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.01uF 10% 16V R786 1-216-864-91 SHORT 0
(TRV130)
R788 1-216-839-11 METAL CHIP 33K 5% 1/16W
< CONNECTOR > R789 1-216-839-11 METAL CHIP 33K 5% 1/16W
R797 1-216-824-11 METAL CHIP 1.8K 5% 1/16W
* CN751 1-695-320-21 PIN, CONNECTOR (1.5MM) (SMD) 2P R3901 1-216-839-11 METAL CHIP 33K 5% 1/16W
* CN752 1-695-320-21 PIN, CONNECTOR (1.5MM) (SMD) 2P (TRV130)
CN753 1-779-336-11 CONNECTOR, FFC/FPC 24P R3902 1-216-829-11 METAL CHIP 4.7K 5% 1/16W
(TRV130)
< DIODE >
R3903 1-216-839-11 METAL CHIP 33K 5% 1/16W
D752 8-719-073-01 DIODE MA111-(K8).S0 (TRV130)
D753 8-719-070-91 DIODE TLSU1008(T05,SOY) R3904 1-216-834-11 METAL CHIP 12K 5% 1/16W
D754 8-719-073-01 DIODE MA111-(K8).S0 (TRV130)
D755 8-719-073-01 DIODE MA111-(K8).S0 R3905 1-216-857-11 METAL CHIP 1M 5% 1/16W
D3901 8-719-067-44 DIODE CL-310IRS-X-TU (TRV130) (TRV130)
R3907 1-218-879-11 METAL CHIP 22K 0.5% 1/16W
D3902 8-719-083-13 DIODE DCS2815 (TRV130) (TRV130)
D3903 8-719-067-44 DIODE CL-310IRS-X-TU (TRV130E) R3908 1-216-815-11 METAL CHIP 330 5% 1/16W
(TRV130)
< IC >
IC751 8-749-012-83 IC RS-180-T

IC752 8-759-712-78 IC BH7871FV-E2
IC753 8-759-489-19 IC uPC6756GR-8JG-E2
IC3901 8-759-566-96 IC AN2920FHQ-EB (TRV130)
6-12
MI-041 PD-131
R3909 1-216-821-11 METAL CHIP 1K 5% 1/16W C5507 1-164-943-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.01uF 10% 16V
(TRV130) C5508 1-125-777-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10% 10V
R3912 1-216-819-11 METAL CHIP 680 5% 1/16W C5509 1-126-602-11 ELECT CHIP 3.3uF 20% 50V
R3913 1-216-847-11 METAL CHIP 150K 5% 1/16W C5511 1-164-739-11 CERAMIC CHIP 560PF 5% 50V
(TRV130)
R3914 1-216-847-11 METAL CHIP 150K 5% 1/16W C5512 1-125-777-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10% 10V
R3915 1-216-818-11 METAL CHIP 560 5% 1/16W C5514 1-119-750-11 TANTAL. CHIP 22uF 20% 6.3V
C5516 1-164-230-11 CERAMIC CHIP 220PF 5% 50V
R3916 1-216-831-11 METAL CHIP 6.8K 5% 1/16W
R3917 1-216-817-11 METAL CHIP 470 5% 1/16W C5518 1-107-826-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10% 16V
R3919 1-216-823-11 METAL CHIP 1.5K 5% 1/16W C5520 1-124-779-00 ELECT CHIP 10uF 20% 16V
(TRV130) C5521 1-127-573-11 CERAMIC CHIP 1uF 10% 16V
R3920 1-216-817-11 METAL CHIP 470 5% 1/16W
(TRV130) C5524 1-127-573-11 CERAMIC CHIP 1uF 10% 16V
R3922 1-216-864-91 SHORT 0 (TRV130) C5529 1-125-777-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10% 10V
R3923 1-216-817-11 METAL CHIP 470 5% 1/16W
(TRV130E) C5603 1-164-657-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.015uF 10% 50V
R3924 1-216-295-11 SHORT 0 (TRV130) C5604 1-125-777-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10% 10V
(TRV130) 0 C5606 1-131-959-91 CERAMIC CHIP 12PF 10% 3KV
(TRV130E)
< CONNECTOR >
R3926 1-216-800-11 RES-CHIP 18 5% 1/16W
(TRV130) CN5501 1-815-031-11 CONNECTOR, FFC/FPC (ZIF) 24P
R3927 1-216-295-11 SHORT 0 (TRV130E) * CN5502 1-573-984-11 CONNECTOR, BOARD TO BOARD 10P
R3929 1-216-027-00 METAL CHIP 120 5% 1/10W CN5601 1-764-709-11 CONNECTOR, FFC/FPC (LIF) 10P
(TRV130E) CN5701 1-794-998-21 PIN, CONNECTOR 20P
R3931 1-216-834-11 METAL CHIP 12K 5% 1/16W CN5702 1-573-346-21 CONNECTOR, FFC/FPC 6P
(TRV130)
R3946 1-216-840-11 METAL CHIP 39K 5% 1/16W < DIODE >
(TRV130)
D5502 8-713-102-80 DIODE 1T369-01-T8A
R3948 1-216-295-11 SHORT 0 (TRV130E) D5601 8-719-073-01 DIODE MA111-(K8).S0
< COMPOSITION CIRCUIT BLOCK > < FERRITE BEAD >
RB751 1-239-702-81 RESISTOR, NETWORK 22K FB5501 1-414-760-21 FERRITE 0uH

RB752 1-239-702-81 RESISTOR, NETWORK 22K FB5502 1-414-760-21 FERRITE 0uH
RB3901 1-239-695-81 RESISTOR, NETWORK 5.6K (TRV130)
< IC >
< SENSOR >
IC5501 8-759-660-92 IC RB5P003AM1
SE751 1-803-042-31 SENSOR, ANGULAR VELOCITY (PITCH) IC5502 8-759-696-68 IC CM7020L1-E2
SE752 1-803-042-41 SENSOR, ANGULAR VELOCITY (YAW) IC5601 8-759-564-49 IC TC7W53FU(TE12R)
************************************************************ IC5602 8-759-075-70 IC TA75S393F-TE85R
A-7074-713-A PD-131 BOARD, COMPLETE < COIL >

**********************
(Ref.No.;30000Series) L5501 1-469-525-91 INDUCTOR 10uH
L5502 1-469-525-91 INDUCTOR 10uH
< CAPACITOR > L5503 1-412-956-21 INDUCTOR 27uH
L5601 1-419-387-21 INDUCTOR 100uH
C5501 1-135-201-11 TANTAL. CHIP 10uF 20% 4V
C5503 1-125-777-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10% 10V < TRANSISTOR >
C5505 1-164-943-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.01uF 10% 16V Q5501 8-729-037-52 TRANSISTOR 2SC4738F-Y/GR(TPL3)
C5506 1-164-943-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.01uF 10% 16V Q5601 8-729-042-29 TRANSISTOR RN1104F(TPL3)
Q5602 8-729-039-43 TRANSISTOR FP216-TL
Q5603 8-729-054-48 TRANSISTOR RN4983FE(TPLR3)
Note : Note :
6-13
PD-131 VC-256
< RESISTOR > A-7096-408-A VC-256 BOARD, COMPLETE (SERVICE)
**********************
R5501 1-216-853-11 METAL CHIP 470K 5% 1/16W (Ref.No.;10000Series)
R5503 1-218-895-11 METAL CHIP 100K 0.5% 1/16W
R5504 1-216-845-11 METAL CHIP 100K 5% 1/16W ************************************************************
R5505 1-216-835-11 METAL CHIP 15K 5% 1/16W
R5506 1-216-826-11 METAL CHIP 2.7K 5% 1/16W
R5507 1-216-841-11 METAL CHIP 47K 5% 1/16W Electrical parts list of the VC-256 board
R5508 1-216-843-11 METAL CHIP 68K 5% 1/16W are not shown.
R5509 1-216-837-11 METAL CHIP 22K 5% 1/16W
R5510 1-216-843-11 METAL CHIP 68K 5% 1/16W
Pages 6-15 to 6-22 are not shown.
R5511 1-216-857-11 METAL CHIP 1M 5% 1/16W
R5512 1-216-845-11 METAL CHIP 100K 5% 1/16W

R5514 1-216-864-91 SHORT 0
R5516 1-216-833-11 METAL CHIP 10K 5% 1/16W
R5517 1-216-849-11 METAL CHIP 220K 5% 1/16W
R5518 1-216-864-91 SHORT 0
R5520 1-216-864-91 SHORT 0

R5521 1-216-841-11 METAL CHIP 47K 5% 1/16W
R5522 1-216-823-11 METAL CHIP 1.5K 5% 1/16W
R5523 1-216-864-91 SHORT 0
R5525 1-216-864-91 SHORT 0
R5526 1-216-853-11 METAL CHIP 470K 5% 1/16W

R5528 1-216-864-91 SHORT 0
R5529 1-216-864-91 SHORT 0
R5530 1-216-864-91 SHORT 0
R5535 1-216-806-11 RES-CHIP 56 5% 1/16W
R5539 1-216-864-91 SHORT 0

R5601 1-216-824-11 METAL CHIP 1.8K 5% 1/16W
R5602 1-216-845-11 METAL CHIP 100K 5% 1/16W
R5603 1-216-834-11 METAL CHIP 12K 5% 1/16W
R5604 1-216-824-11 METAL CHIP 1.8K 5% 1/16W
R5606 1-216-837-11 METAL CHIP 22K 5% 1/16W

R5607 1-216-817-11 METAL CHIP 470 5% 1/16W
R5610 1-216-864-91 SHORT 0
R5702 1-216-833-11 METAL CHIP 10K 5% 1/16W
R5703 1-216-864-91 SHORT 0
< COMPOSITION CIRCUIT BLOCK >
RB5501 1-234-372-21 RES, NETWORK 100X4 (1005)

RB5601 1-239-698-11 RESISTOR, NETWORK 10K
< TRANSFORMER >
0 T5601 1-435-227-11 TRANSFORMER, INVERTER

************************************************************
Note : Note :
6-14
VF-129
A-7073-838-A VF-129 (N) BOARD, COMPLETE (TRV130) R911 1-216-160-00 RES-CHIP 27 5% 1/8W
********************************* R912 1-216-857-11 METAL CHIP 1M 5% 1/16W
A-7073-855-A VF-129 (P) BOARD, COMPLETE (TRV130E) R915 1-218-879-11 METAL CHIP 22K 0.5% 1/16W
********************************** (TRV130)
(Ref.No.;1000Series) R916 1-218-881-11 METAL CHIP 27K 0.5% 1/16W
(TRV130E)
< CAPACITOR > R917 1-218-891-11 METAL CHIP 68K 0.5% 1/16W
(TRV130)
C901 1-107-854-11 TANTAL. CHIP 68uF 20% 6.3V
C902 1-163-038-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 25V R917 1-218-893-11 METAL CHIP 82K 0.5% 1/16W
C903 1-135-145-11 TANTAL. CHIP 0.47uF 10% 35V (TRV130E)
C905 1-104-752-11 TANTAL. CHIP 33uF 20% 6.3V R919 1-216-843-11 METAL CHIP 68K 5% 1/16W
R920 1-216-837-11 METAL CHIP 22K 5% 1/16W
C906 1-162-638-11 CERAMIC CHIP 1uF 16V R921 1-216-795-11 RES-CHIP 6.8 5% 1/16W
C907 1-104-563-11 FILM CHIP 0.1uF 5% 16V
C908 1-162-920-11 CERAMIC CHIP 27PF 5% 50V R922 1-216-850-11 METAL CHIP 270K 5% 1/16W
C909 1-163-009-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.001uF 10% 50V R923 1-216-857-11 METAL CHIP 1M 5% 1/16W
0 C910 1-162-625-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.0047uF 5% 50V R924 1-216-862-11 RES-CHIP 2.7M 5% 1/16W
R925 1-216-862-11 RES-CHIP 2.7M 5% 1/16W
0 C911 1-164-715-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.0068uF 5% 50V R926 1-216-821-11 METAL CHIP 1K 5% 1/16W
C912 1-107-854-11 TANTAL. CHIP 68uF 20% 6.3V
C913 1-135-145-11 TANTAL. CHIP 0.47uF 10% 35V R927 1-216-821-11 METAL CHIP 1K 5% 1/16W
C914 1-113-984-11 TANTAL. CHIP 1.5uF 20% 35V R928 1-216-827-11 METAL CHIP 3.3K 5% 1/16W
R930 1-216-791-11 METAL CHIP 3.3 5% 1/16W
C916 1-135-475-91 CERAMIC CHIP 0.001uF 10% 630V R931 1-217-671-11 METAL CHIP 1 5% 1/10W
< CONNECTOR > R932 1-216-829-11 METAL CHIP 4.7K 5% 1/16W
* CN901 1-785-379-01 CONNECTOR, FFC/FPC 4P < VARIABLE RESISTOR >

* CN902 1-580-057-11 PIN, CONNECTOR (SMD) 4P
RV903 1-238-852-11 RES, ADJ, CERMET 470
< DIODE > RV904 1-238-095-11 RES, ADJ, CERMET 470K
D901 8-719-951-21 DIODE PR1102W-TR < TRANSFORMER >

D903 8-719-073-01 DIODE MA111-(K8).S0
0 T901 1-453-124-11 TRANSFORMER ASSY, FLYBACK
< IC >
< FLAT CABLE >
IC901 8-759-196-14 IC BA7149F-E2
0 W901 1-540-019-21 SOCKET ASSY, CRT
< COIL > ************************************************************
L901 1-412-031-11 INDUCTOR CHIP 47uH ACCESSORIES

L902 1-410-387-11 INDUCTOR CHIP 33uH ***********
0 L903 1-411-697-11 COIL, FERRITE (HLC)
1-475-141-61 REMOTE COMMANDER (RMT-814)
< TRANSISTOR > (TRV130/TRV130E)
0 1-475-599-11 ADAPTOR, AC (AC-L10A)
Q901 8-729-230-63 TRANSISTOR 2SD1819A-QRS-TX (TRV130:US,CND,E,HK,BR/TRV130E:AEP,UK,E,HK,AUS)
Q902 8-729-106-68 TRANSISTOR 2SD1615-T1GLGK 0 1-475-599-71 ADAPTOR, AC (AC-L10A)(TRV130:KR)
Q903 8-729-216-31 TRANSISTOR 2SA1163G-TE85L 0 1-475-599-81 ADAPTOR, AC (AC-L10B)(TRV130E:CN)
Q904 8-729-230-63 TRANSISTOR 2SD1819A-QRS-TX 0 1-569-008-21 ADAPTOR, CONVERSION 2P
(TRV130:E,HK/TRV130E:E,HK)
< RESISTOR >
1-573-291-11 ADAPTOR, CONVERSION 21P
R901 1-216-817-11 METAL CHIP 470 5% 1/16W (TRV130E:AEP,UK)
R902 1-216-817-11 METAL CHIP 470 5% 1/16W 0 1-696-819-11 CORD, POWER (TRV130E:AUS)
R903 1-216-055-00 METAL CHIP 1.8K 5% 1/10W 1-765-080-11 CORD, CONNECTION (AV CABLE)(1.5m)
R904 1-216-833-11 METAL CHIP 10K 5% 1/16W 0 1-769-608-11 CORD, POWER (TRV130:E/TRV130E:AEP,E)
R905 1-216-822-11 METAL CHIP 1.2K 5% 1/16W 0 1-776-985-11 CORD, POWER (TRV130:KR)
R906 1-216-823-11 METAL CHIP 1.5K 5% 1/16W 0 1-782-476-11 CORD, POWER (TRV130E:CN)
R907 1-216-845-11 METAL CHIP 100K 5% 1/16W 0 1-783-374-11 CORD, POWER (TRV130:HK/TRV130E:UK,HK)
R908 1-216-852-11 METAL CHIP 390K 5% 1/16W 0 1-790-107-22 CORD, POWER (TRV130:US,CND)
R909 1-216-833-11 METAL CHIP 10K 5% 1/16W 3-987-015-01 BELT (S), SHOULDER
R910 1-216-835-11 METAL CHIP 15K 5% 1/16W A-7094-140-A NP-F330 BATTERY PACK (TRV130:US,CND)
Note : Note :
6-23
Ref. No. Part No. Description Remarks
A-7094-141-A NP-F330 BATTERY PACK (TRV130E:AEP,UK)
A-7094-141-B NP-F330 BATTERY PACK
(TRV130:E,HK,KR,BR/TRV130E:HK,E,AUS,CN)
X-3949-376-1 CAP (N) ASSY,LENS
3-742-854-01 LID,BATTERY CASE (FOR RMT-814)
3-065-651-11 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS (ENGLISH)
(TRV130:US,CND,E,HK)
3-065-651-21 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS (FRENCH)

(TRV130:CND)
3-065-651-31 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
(SPANISH/PORTUGUESE) (TRV130:E,BR)
(TRANDTIONAL CHINESE) (TRV130:E,HK)
3-065-651-51 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS (KOREAN)
(TRV130:KR)
3-065-651-61 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS (ARABIC)
(TRV130:E)

(ENGLISH/RUSSIAN) (TRV130E:AEP,UK)
(FRENCH/GERMAN) (TRV130E:AEP)
3-065-652-31 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS (ENGLISH/DUTCH)
(TRV130E:AEP)
(SPANISH/PORTUGUESE) (TRV130E:AEP)
3-065-652-51 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS (ITALIAN/GREEK)
(TRV130E:AEP)

(ENGLISH/SWEDISH) (TRV130E:AEP)
3-065-652-71 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS (FINNISH/DANISH)
(TRV130E:AEP)
3-065-652-81 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS (POLISH/CZECH)
(TRV130E:AEP)
(SLOVAKIAN/HUNGARIAN) (TRV130E:AEP)
(ENGLISH/RUSSIAN) (TRV130E:E,HK,AUS,CN)

(FRENCH/GERMAN) (TRV130E:E)
(ARABIC/PERSIAN) (TRV130E:E)
(SIMPLIFIED CHINESE) (TRV130E:E,CN)
(TRADITIONAL CHINESE) (TRV130E:HK)
6-24E
〈FOR CAMERA COLOR REPRODUCTION ADJUSTMENT〉
For NTSC model
DCR-TRV130
Take a copy of CAMERA COLOR
REPRODUCTION FRAME with
a clear sheet for use.
✂
For PAL model
DCR-TRV130E
✂
— 179 —
DCR-TRV130/TRV130E
Sony EMCS Co. 2001E1600-1

9-929-860-32 ©2001.5
— 180 — Published by DI Customer Center
DCR-TRV130/TRV130E RMT-814
US Model
Canadian Model
Korea Model
Brazilian Model
SERVICE MANUAL AEP Model
DCR-TRV130
Level 2 UK Model
Australian Model
2001. 11 Chinese Model
DCR-TRV130E
E Model
Hong Kong Model
DCR-TRV130/TRV130E
SUPPLEMENT-1
File this supplement with the Service Manual.
(PV01-032)
Subject
• This SUPPLEMENT-1 describes the change of the CCD imager of the DCR-TRV130
(NTSC model) from type S to type M.
The following contents are added in accordance with this change.
Type S Type M
CCD BLOCK ASSY A-7030-821-A A-7031-203-A
A-7096-408-A A-7096-407-A
VC-256 Board (for service)
(1-680-212-11) (1-680-212-13)
Note: See page 2 “Discrimination of the CCD imager type” on how to identify the
CCD imager type S from type M.
• The LCD (Liquid Crystal Display) panel is supplied as the block assembly.

DCR-TRV130/TRV130E
Discrimination of the CCD imager type TABLE OF CONTENTS

4. PRINTED WIRING BOARDS AND
Check the following data
SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS
Data 4-2. PRINTED WIRING BOARDS AND
Page Address
Type S Type M SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS ··············································· 3
7 A2 00 57 • CD-281 (CCD IMAGER)
7 A3 00 88 SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM ································· 3
F 3B 4A 70
5. ADJUSTMENTS
F DD 72 52
1. Before starting adjustment ·················································· 4
F DF D0 E0 1-1. Adjusting items when replacing main parts and boards ····· 4
F FB 01 81 3. F Page Table ······································································· 6
4. E Page Table ······································································· 7
Discrimination of the lens type 1-3. CAMERA SYSTEM ADJUSTMENTS ····························· 8
0-1. Lens Type Input ·································································· 8
1) Select page: 6, address: 01, set data: 65, and press PAUSE 0-2. CCD Imager Type Input (DCR-TRV130 (NTSC)) ············ 8
button. 8. Auto White Balance Adjustment ········································ 9
3) Select page: 1. and check the display data. 6. REPAIR PARTS LIST
6-1. EXPLODED VIEWS ······················································· 10
Glass type Plastic type 6-1-5. CABINET (R) SECTION ················································ 10
DisplayData 0000 0001 6-1-2. CABINET (L) SECTION ················································· 10
6-1-4. LENS SECTION ······························································ 10
Note: 1 : XX : XX
Display data
4) Select page: 6, address: 01, set data: 00, and press PAUSE
button.
—2—
DCR-TRV130/TRV130E
SECTION 4. PRINTED WIRING BOARDS AND SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS

4-2. PRINTED WIRING BOARDS AND SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS < Page 4-8 >
1 2 3 4 5 6
CD-281 BOARD NO MARK:REC/PB MODE

R :REC MODE
CCD IMAGER P :PB MODE
A -REF.NO.:1000 SERIES-
XX MARK:NO MOUNT
CN191 14P
1
V4 14
IC191
V3 13 2 CCD IMAGER
V2 12
V1 11
B TO GND 10
VC-256 BOARD(1/15)
CN1501 RG 9
R-4.7/P0
R-4.7/P0
R-0.2/P0
R-0.2/P0
R-7.6/P0
3
R9.2/P0
THROUGH H1 8
THE FP-259
FLEXIBLE H2 7
C196
47u R194
GND 6 10V 0
(SEE PAGE 4-31) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
CAM_-7.5V 5
GND
V4
V3
V2
V1
CCD_OUT
NC(VL)
VSHT 4
CAM_12V 3 IC191
C GND 2
ICX089AK-43
ICX091KA-43
:TRV130
:TRV130E
MN39230FHJ-S :TRV130
CCD OUT 1 R195
XX 4 TYPE M MODEL
VL(CSUB)
SHT(SUB)
5
IC191 *
DGND
VDD
H2
H1
RG
14 13 12 11 10 9 8
R1.4/P0
R1.6/P0
R9.9/P0
R-5.0/P0.4
R7.7/P0
R12.0/P0
D
R192 R198 C197

0 0 0.1u
B
C193
XX
B
E SIGNAL PATH L191

100uH
C195
0.1u
R12.0/P0
F
VIDEO SIGNAL
Q191
2SC4178-F13F14-T1
CHROMA Y Y/CHROMA C191
BUFFER
22u R9.2/P0
R191 16V
REC 0
1608 R8.5/P0
PB
R193
3.3k
1608
6 C194
XX LND191
F TYPE M MODEL :DCR-TRV130

Precautions Upon Replacing CCD imager
• The CD-281 board mounted as a repair part is not equipped
with a CCD imager.
When replacing this board, remove the CCD imager from the
old one and mount it onto the new one.
G • If the CCD imager has been replaced, carry out all the
adjustments for the camera section.
• As the CCD imager may be damaged by static electricity from
its structure, handle it carefully like for the MOS IC.
In addition, ensure that the receiver is not covered with dusts
16 nor exposed to strong light.
CCD IMAGER
—3— CD-281
5-2
Page
1.
1-1.
Camera
Camera
Section
Section
page data
page data
Adjustment
Adjustment
C, D, E, F, 7, 8
C, D, E, F, 7, 8
DCR-TRV130/TRV130E
HALL adj.
HALL adj.
Adjustment
Adjustment
Lens type input

Flange back adj.
Flange back adj.

Color reproduction adj.
Color reproduction adj.

Auto white balance adj.
Auto white balance adj.

CCD imager type input *4
SECTION 5. ADJUSTMENTS
AWB & LV standard data input
AWB & LV standard data input

Initialization of E, F, 7 page data
Initialization of E, F, 7 page data

Initialization of Initialization of C, D, 8 page data
Initialization of Initialization of C, D, 8 page data

Angular velocity sensor sens. adj.
Angular velocity sensor sens. adj.

Before starting adjustment
Lens device Lens device
z
z
z
z
z
z
Video light *2 Video light *2
EL-Back light *3 EL-Back light *3
LCD block ND901 (Fluorescent tube) LCD block ND901 (Fluorescent tube)
—4—
LCD block LCD901 (LCD panel) LCD block LCD901 (LCD panel)
Type S
Type M
z
z
EVF block V901 (Picture tube) EVF block V901 (Picture tube)
Mechanism deck *1 Mechanism deck *1
Block replacement
Block replacement
Mechanism deck M901 (Drum assy.) *1 Mechanism deck M901 (Drum assy.) *1
z
z
Mechanism deck LS chassis assy. Mechanism deck LS chassis assy.
Adjusting items when replacing main parts and boards.
When replacing main parts, adjust the items indicated by z in the following table.
z
z
z
z
z
z
CD-281 board IC191 (CCD imager) CD-281 board IC191 (CCD imager)
VC-256 board IC1501, X1501 (Timing generator) VC-256 board IC1501, X1501 (Timing generator)
z
z
z
z
z
z
VC-256 board IC1502 (S/H, AGC) VC-256 board IC1502 (S/H, AGC)
z
VC-256 board IC3301 (DV signal process) VC-256 board IC3301 (DV signal process)
Replaced parts
Replaced parts
VC-256 board IC3101 (EQ, A/D conv. PLL) VC-256 board IC3101 (EQ, A/D conv. PLL)
VC-256 board IC3103 (REC/PB AMP) VC-256 board IC3103 (REC/PB AMP)
VC-256 board IC3701 (Video out) VC-256 board IC3701 (Video out)
VC-256 board IC1601 (EVR) VC-256 board IC1601 (EVR)
Parts replacement
Parts replacement
VC-256 board IC5401 (Audio out) VC-256 board IC5401 (Audio out)
z
z
MI-041 board SE751,752 (PITCH,YAW sensor) MI-041 board SE751,752 (PITCH,YAW sensor)
MI-041 board IC3901 (IR transmitter) *2 MI-041 board IC3901 (IR transmitter) *2
PD-131 board IC5501 (RGB driver (LCD)) PD-131 board IC5501 (RGB driver (LCD))
PD-131 board IC5502 (Timing generator (LCD)) PD-131 board IC5502 (Timing generator (LCD))
VF-129 board IC901 (CRT drive (EVF)) VF-129 board IC901 (CRT drive (EVF))
: Added portion.
DCR-TRV130/TRV130E
: Added portion.
Page Type S
When replacing a board or EEPROM, adjust the items indicated by z in the following table.
*1: When replacing the drum assy. or mechanism deck, reset
EEPROM
Board the data of page: 2, address: A2 to A4 to “00”. (Refer to
replacement “Record of Use check” of “5-4. SERVICE MODE”)
*2: When replacing the video light, reset the data of page:
2, address: E0 to E2 to “00”. (Refer to “Record of Use
check” of “5-4. SERVICE MODE”)
*3: When replacing the EL-Back light, reset the data of
page: 2, address: E3 to E5 to “00”. (Refer to “Record of
(COMPLETE)
(COMPLETE)
(COMPLETE)
(COMPLETE)
Use check” of “5-4. SERVICE MODE”)
Adjustment *4: NTSC model only
Adjustment
Section
IC4502
IC4901
VC-256 board
VC-256 board
VC-256 board
PD-131 board
VF-129 board
MI-041 board
C, D, E, F, 7, 8
HALL adj. z z
Camera
C i dj z
Type M
5-3
EEPROM
Board
replacement
(COMPLETE)
(COMPLETE)
(COMPLETE)
(COMPLETE)
Adjustment
Adjustment
Section
IC4502
IC4901
VC-256 board
VC-256 board
VC-256 board
PD-131 board
VF-129 board
MI-041 board

C, D, E, F, 7, 8
Lens type input z z
CCD imager type input *4 z z
HALL adj. z z
Camera
C i dj z
—5—
DCR-TRV130/TRV130E
: Added portion. : Changed portion.

Page Type S Type M
3. F Page Table 3. F Page Table
Note: Fixed data-1: Initialized data. (Refer to “1. Initializing the E, F, Note: Fixed data-1: Initialized data. (Refer to “1. Initializing the E, F,
7 Page Data”.) 7 Page Data”.)
Fixed data-2: Modified data. (Refer to “2. Modification of E, F, Fixed data-2: Modified data. (Refer to “2. Modification of E, F,
Address Initial value Remark Address Initial value Remark

NTSC PAL NTSC PAL
00 to 0F 00 to 0F
10 to 27 Fixed data-1 10 to 27 Fixed data-1
29 to 37 Fixed data-1 29 to 2B Fixed data-1
38 68 68 HALL adj. 2C D6(*1) D6(*1) Lens type input
39 80 80 D7(*2) D7(*2)
3A 8D 8D 2D to 37 Fixed data-1
3B Fixed data-2 38 68 68 HALL adj.
3C 80 80 Auto white balance & LV standard
3D 7A 7A data Input 3B 4A(*5) CCD imager type input (*3)
70(*6) Fixed data-2 (*4)
3C 80 80 Auto white balance & LV standard
5-11
5-12
DA 31 11 Color reproduction adj. DA 31 11 Color reproduction adj.
DB to DE Fixed data-1 DB to DC Fixed data-1
DF Fixed data-2 DD 72(*5) CCD imager type input (*3)
E0 to E9 Fixed data-1 52(*6) Fixed data-1 (*4)
FA Fixed data-2 DE Fixed data-1
FB to FF Fixed data-1 DF D0(*5) CCD imager type input (*3)
Table. 5-1-5. E0(*6) Fixed data-2 (*4)
E0 to E9 Fixed data-1
FA Fixed data-2
FB 01(*5) CCD imager type input (*3)
81(*6) Fixed data-1 (*4)
FC to FF Fixed data-1
*1: Glass type lens

*2: Plastic type lens
*3: NTSC model
*4: PAL model
*5: NTSC model with CCD type S
*6: NTSC model with CCD type M
Table. 5-1-5.
—6—
DCR-TRV130/TRV130E

Page Type S Type M
4. E Page Table 4. E Page Table
Note: Fixed data-1: Initialized data. (Refer to “1. Initializing the E, F, Note: Fixed data-1: Initialized data. (Refer to “1. Initializing the E, F,
Fixed data-2: Modified data. (Refer to “2. Modification of E, F, Fixed data-2: Modified data. (Refer to “2. Modification of E, F,
Address Remark Address Initial value Remark

NTSC PAL
00 to 03 Fixed data-1 00 to 03 Fixed data-1

58 to 7D Fixed data-1 58 to 5B Fixed data-1
7E Fixed data-2 5C 21(*1) 21(*1) Lens type input
7F to FF Fixed data-1 22(*2) 22(*2)
5-12 5D 84(*1) 84(*1)
Table. 5-1-6.
51(*2) 51(*2)
5E FC(*1) FC(*1)
FD(*2) FD(*2)
5F F7(*1) F7(*1)
C4(*2) C4(*2)
60 to 7D Fixed data-1
7E Fixed data-2
7F to FF Fixed data-1
*1: Glass type lens

*2: Plastic type lens
Table. 5-1-6.
—7—
DCR-TRV130/TRV130E
: Added portion.
Page Type M
1-3. CAMERA SYSTEM ADJUSTMENTS
Before perform the camera system adjustments, check that the
specified values of “VIDEO SYSTEM ADJUSTMENTS” are
satisfied.
0-1. Lens Type Input 0-2. CCD Imager Type Input (DCR-TRV130 (NTSC))
Distinguish the type of the lens being used for the camcorder, Distinguish the type of the CCD imager used for the camcorder,
and input data corresponding to the type. and input data corresponding to the type.
Subject Not required Subject Not required
Measurement Point Display data of page 1 (Note) Measurement Point Display data of page 6 (Note)
Measuring Instrument Adjustment remote commander Measuring Instrument Adjustment remote commander
Adjustment Page E F Adjustment Page 7 F
Adjustment Address 5C, 5D, 5E, 5F 2C Adjustment Address A2, A3 3B, DD DF, FB
Note: Displayed data of page 1 of the adjustment remote commander.

1 : XX : XX Adjusting method:
Display data
Adjusting method: 2 6 04 Check that the data is “00” to “21”.
Order Page Address Data Procedure 3 Check that the type of the CCD
1 0 01 01 Set the data. imager.
When the CCD type M is used,
2 6 01 65 Set the data, and press PAUSE button.
proceed to step 4.
3 0 03 19 Set the data. When the CCD type S is used,
4 1 Check that the data. proceed to step 11.
When the data is “0000”, proceed 4 7 A2 57 Set the data, and press PAUSE button.
to step 5. (Glass lens type)
5 7 A3 88 Set the data, and press PAUSE button.
When the data is “0001”, proceed
to step 11. (Plastic lens type) 6 F 3B 70 Set the data, and press PAUSE button.
5-13 5 E 5C 21 Set the data, and press PAUSE button. 7 F DD 52 Set the data, and press PAUSE button.
6 E 5D 84 Set the data, and press PAUSE button. 8 F DF E0 Set the data, and press PAUSE button.
7 E 5E FC Set the data, and press PAUSE button. 9 F FB 81 Set the data, and press PAUSE button.
8 E 5F F7 Set the data, and press PAUSE button. 10 Proceed to step 17.
9 F 2C D6 Set the data, and press PAUSE button. 11 7 A2 00 Set the data, and press PAUSE button.
10 Proceed to step 16. 12 7 A3 00 Set the data, and press PAUSE button.
11 E 5C 22 Set the data, and press PAUSE button. 13 F 3B 4A Set the data, and press PAUSE button.
12 E 5D 51 Set the data, and press PAUSE button. 14 F DD 72 Set the data, and press PAUSE button.
13 E 5E FD Set the data, and press PAUSE button. 15 F DF D0 Set the data, and press PAUSE button.
14 E 5F C4 Set the data, and press PAUSE button. 16 F FB 01 Set the data, and press PAUSE button.
15 F 2C D7 Set the data, and press PAUSE button. 17 0 01 01 Set the data.
16 6 01 00 Set the data, and press PAUSE button.
1. HALL Adjustment
For detecting the position of the lens iris, adjust AMP gain and
offset.
Subject Not required
Adjustment Page F
Adjustment Address 38, 39, 3A
Specified Value 1 88 to 8C
Specified Value 2 15 to 19
—8—
DCR-TRV130/TRV130E

Page Type S Type M
8. Auto White Balance Adjustment
Adjust to the proper auto white balance output data.
If it is not correct, auto white balance and color reproducibility
will be poor.
Subject Clear chart
correction
Adjustment Page F
Adjustment Address 42, 43
Specified Value NTSC model Specified Value NTSC model (CCD type S)
R ratio: 2C40 to 2CC0 R ratio: 2C40 to 2CC0
B ratio: 5E20 to 5EE0 B ratio: 5E20 to 5EE0
PAL model PAL model
R ratio: 2D40 to 2DC0 R ratio: 2D40 to 2DC0
B ratio: 5B20 to 5BE0 B ratio: 5B20 to 5BE0
NTSC model (CCD type M)
R ratio: 29C0 to 2A40
B ratio: 61A0 to 6260
Adjusting method: Adjusting method:

Order Page Address Data Procedure Order Page Address Data Procedure
1 Place the C14 filter for color 1 Place the C14 filter for color
5-19
temperature correction on the lens. temperature correction on the lens.
2 0 01 01 Set the data. 2 0 01 01 Set the data.
3 F B8 Write down the data. 3 F B8 Write down the data.
4 F B8 Set the following data, and press 4 F B8 Set the following data, and press
PAUSE button. PAUSE button.
2C (NTSC), 2D (PAL) 2C (NTSC (CCD type S)), 2D (PAL)
5 F B9 Write down the data. 2A (NTSC (CCD type M))
6 F B9 80 Set the data, and press PAUSE 5 F B9 Write down the data.
button. 6 F B9 Set the following data, and press
7 F BA Write down the data. PAUSE button.
80 (NTSC (CCD type S)), 80 (PAL)
8 F BA Set the following data, and press
00 (NTSC (CCD type M))
PAUSE button.
5E (NTSC), 5B (PAL) 7 F BA Write down the data.
9 F BB Write down the data. 8 F BA Set the following data, and press
PAUSE button.
10 F BB 80 Set the data, and press PAUSE
5E (NTSC (CCD type S)), 5B (PAL)
button.
9 F BB Write down the data.
button.
10 F BB Set the following data, and press
PAUSE button.
80 (NTSC (CCD type S)), 80 (PAL)
button.
—9—
DCR-TRV130/TRV130E
SECTION 6. REPAIR PARTS LIST

6-1. EXPLODED VIEWS : Added portion. : Changed portion. : Deleted portion.
Page Old New
6-1-5. CABINET (R) SECTION 6-1-5. CABINET (R) SECTION
A A
B 207 B 210
C C
LCD902
206 D901 206 D901
6-5
201 201
207 1-680-201-11 FP-260 FLEXIBLE BOARD
208 1-757-397-21 CABLE, FLEXIBLE FLAT (FFC-295) 208 1-757-397-21 CABLE, FLEXIBLE FLAT (FFC-295)
209 3-941-343-21 TAPE (A) 209 3-941-343-21 TAPE (A)
210 A-7096-931-A LCD BLOCK ASSY (FOR SERVICE)
0 D901 1-518-724-11 ELEMENT, ELECTRO LUMINOUS 0 D901 1-518-724-11 ELEMENT, ELECTRO LUMINOUS
LCD902 1-804-272-11 DISPLAY PANEL, LIQUID CRYSTAL
S901 1-771-848-11 SWITCH, PUSH S901 1-771-848-11 SWITCH, PUSH
Type S Type M
6-1-2. CABINET (L) SECTION 6-1-2. CABINET (L) SECTION
65 A-7096-407-A VC-256 (IB-S) BOARD, COMPLETE
(SERVICE)(TRV130)
65 A-7096-408-A VC-256 (IB-S) BOARD, COMPLETE 65 A-7096-408-A VC-256 (IB-S) BOARD, COMPLETE
6-2 (SERVICE) (SERVICE)(TRV130E)
66 3-948-339-61 TAPPING 66 3-948-339-61 TAPPING
67 1-680-200-11 FP-259 FLEXIBLE BOARD 67 1-680-200-11 FP-259 FLEXIBLE BOARD
68 3-065-662-01 LABEL, LS CAUTION 68 3-065-662-01 LABEL, LS CAUTION
69 3-941-343-21 TAPE (A) 69 3-941-343-21 TAPE (A)
70 3-067-254-01 SHEET (10), ABSORBING 70 3-067-254-01 SHEET (10), ABSORBING
6-1-4. LENS SECTION 6-1-4. LENS SECTION

160 1-758-216-21 FILTER BLOCK, OPTICAL 160 1-758-216-21 FILTER BLOCK, OPTICAL
161 3-953-817-01 RUBBER (F), SEAL (TRV130E) 161 3-953-817-01 RUBBER (F), SEAL (TRV130E)
161 3-968-054-11 RUBBER (FM), SHIELD (TRV130) 161 3-968-054-11 RUBBER (FM), SHIELD (TRV130)
162 A-7074-712-A CD-281 (X) BOARD,COMPLETE 162 A-7074-712-A CD-281 (X) BOARD,COMPLETE
6-4 163 3-318-203-11 SCREW (B1.7X6), TAPPING 163 3-318-203-11 SCREW (B1.7X6), TAPPING
IC191 A-7030-821-A CCD BLOCK ASSY (CCD IMAGER)(TRV130) IC191 A-7031-203-A CCD BLOCK ASSY (CCD IMAGER)(TRV130)
IC191 A-7031-206-A CCD BLOCK ASSY (CCD IMAGER)(TRV130E) IC191 A-7031-206-A CCD BLOCK ASSY (CCD IMAGER)(TRV130E)
Sony EMCS Co. 2001K1600-1

9-929-860-81 ©2001.11
— 10 — Published by DI Customer Center
Reverse 992986033.pdf
Revision History
S.M. Rev.
Ver. Date History Contents
issued
1.0 2001.01 Official Release — —
1.1 2001.05 Correction Error correction Yes
S.M. correction: Page 6-2
1.2 2001.11 Supplement-1 • The change of the CCD imager of the DCR- No
(PV01-032) TRV130 (NTSC model) from type S to type M.
• The LCD (Liquid Crystal Display) panel is
supplied as the block assembly.

Service Manual - Handycam - Dcrtrv130e

Uploaded by

Document Informationclick to expand document information

Document Informationclick to expand document information

Copyright:

Available Formats

Service Manual - Handycam - Dcrtrv130e

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Service Manual - Handycam - Dcrtrv130e

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

DCR-TRV130/TRV130E RMT-814

SERVICE MANUAL US Model

On the VC-256 board For MECHANISM ADJUSTMENT, refer to the

— Continued on next page —

DIGITAL VIDEO CAMERA RECORDER

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Table for difference of function

SAFETY-RELATED COMPONENT WARNING!! ATTENTION AU COMPOSANT AYANT RAPPORT

After correcting the original service problem, perform the following

6. REPAIR PARTS LIST

Parts list of the VC-256 board are not shown.

* Color reproduction frame is shown on page 179.

1. POWER SUPPLY DURING REPAIRS

2. TO TAKE OUT A CASSETTE WHEN NOT EJECT (FORCE EJECT)

7 Pull the timing belt in the direction of

Press the cassette compartment not

8 Let your hold the cassette

1. Self-diagnosis Function 2. Self-diagnosis Display

Repaired by: Block Detailed Code

3. Service Mode Display

3-1. Display Method

Viewfinder or LCD Display window

Backup No. Self-diagnosis Codes

3-3. End of Display

Block Detailed Symptom/State Correction

C 0 4 0 0 Non-standard battery is used. Use the InfoLITHIUM battery.

Inspect the lens block focus reset sensor (Pin qs of CN1551 of

2-1. Video light

2-2. LCD section (PD-131 board) PD-131 board service position

2-4. Cabinet (L) section Mechanism deck service position

Note : Use the parts only which can be removed

2-6. EVF section (VF-129 board) VF-129, CD-281, MI-041 boards

2-8, Lens section

2-9. VC-256 board Service position to check the VTR section

2-10. Mechanism deck Service position to check the Camera section

Info lithium battery

NOTE: Follow the disassembly procedure in the numerical order given.

3 Remove in the direction

1 Push in the dent

[PD-131 BOARD SERVICE POSITION]

Info lithium battery PD-131 board

1 Open the jack cover

[MI-041 BOARD SERVICE POSITION]

Info lithium battery

1 3 Cassette lid assembly

8 Cabinet (L) section

[MECHANISM DECK SERVICE POSITION]

7 Cabinet (R) section

5 Harness 3 Three MI screws

7 Remove the control switch block

B 6 Tape (A) 8 Control switch block

5 Five tapping 2 FP-260 flexible board (16P)

1 FFC-295 flexible flat cable (24P)

1 FFC-289 flexible 2 Three tapping Tape (A)

3 Finder (S) assembly 1 Tape (A) FFC-289 flexible

B 8 CRT assembly, VF-129 board,

7 EVF cabinet lower B